SATIP W 011 01 Welding of On Plot Piping

SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID FORM REV 1 - 010109
Rev 3
SAUDI ARAMCO TYPICAL INSPECTION PLAN
COS 06/30/2008
SATIP No.
Welding of On-Plot Piping
SATIP-W-011-01
PROJECT TITLE:
ITEM
NO.
PROJECT PHASE
1.0
DOCUMENT REVIEW
1.1
APPROVED DATE
CONTRACT NUMBER
QUALITY
PROCEDURE
TASK / ACTIVITY
QUALITY
RECORD
DISCIPLINE:
MECHANICAL
11-Dec-13
CONTRACTOR
INSPECTION RESPONSIBILITY
ASSIGNMENTS
CNTRCTR
REMARKS
SAUDI
ARAMCO
SPECIAL PROCESS (WELDING) REQUIRES BEST QUALITY PRACTICE, CPI & EFFICIENT METHODS IN PROCEDURES. PROPOSE BEST METHODS.
Welding Procedure Specifications/ Welding Procedure
Qualification Record (WPS /WPQR)
1.2
Welder/Welding Operator Certification Review and Issuance of

JCC
1.3
Method Statement & WPS for weld Repair, ie:

a.) Crack and other weld defects
Welds mis-alignments
SAIC-W-2001
SAIC-W-2001
RH
RH
Use NOTIFICATION FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION TEST & SAICW-2037*
Welding Process Control (Procedural Element)
QA/QC Mgr. Action is required for SAIC-W-2035
*Socket Welding is now qualified per SAIC-W-2037;NOTIFICATION
FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION TEST follow S-EP-GC00-15200006_R2
SAIC-W-2035
SAIC-W-2035
RH
b.)
SAIC-W-2002
SAIC-W-2002
RH
RH
1.4
Procedure & Weld Database for Weld ID, Traceability, Tracking &
Status Reporting (SAEP-1160*)
SAIC-W-2008
SAIC-W-2008
RH
RH
1.5
Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) Procedure & Equipment

Package
SAIC-W-2003
SAIC-W-2003
SATR-W2004
RH
RH
1.6
Weld Hardness Testing Procedure & Proposed M&TE Equipment

Records
SAIC-W-2012
SAIC-W-2012
RH
RH
1.7
Gap Control Procedure & Inspection of Welded Socket & Threaded

See Remarks
Joints
See Remarks
1.8
Positive Material Identification Procedure (Alloy Verification)
SAIC-L-2004
SAIC-L-2004
1.9
A) NDE Proc. (Technique)

B) NDE Process Control
Proc.
C) NDE Specification Review
D) NDE Kickoff Meeting
See Remarks
See Remarks
1.10
Procedure for Control of Welding Consumables
SAIC-W-2009
SAIC-W-2009
1.11
Welding Overlays & Clad Materials*
See Remarks
See Remarks
Refer to SATIP No: W-014-01(*Rare application)
1.12
Welding Strip Linings* (As Required)
See Remarks
See Remarks
Refer to SATIP No: W-015-01 & applicable SATIP-W series (as

required) *Rarely applies to Plant Piping
Page 1 of 4
Use SAIC-L-2015 during process(See SATIP-L-350-01)

RH
RH
Refer to respective SATIP for NDE. (SATIP-NDE-UT-01, LPT-01 MPT01, RT-01) *QA/QC Mgr. action!
SEE NOTICE
IN GENERAL NOTES SECTION!
RH
RH
Rev 3
COS 06/30/2008
SATIP No.
SATIP-W-011-01
PROJECT TITLE:
ITEM
NO.
APPROVED DATE
CONTRACT NUMBER
11-Dec-13
DISCIPLINE:
MECHANICAL
CONTRACTOR
ASSIGNMENTS
QUALITY
PROCEDURE
QUALITY
RECORD
Welding Special* Corrosion-Resistant Materials (As Required)
See Remarks
See Remarks
2.1
Receiving Inspection & Verification of Welding Consumable

Controls in Place (Properties, type, source, segregation, storage,
Issue, Handling, etc.)
SAIC-W-2010
SAIC-W-2010 SATR-W-2009
SATR-W-2020
Saudi aramco shall verify and inspect the first batch of

deliveredconsumables, then random inspection thereafter
2.2
Verify Welding Equipment Calibration
SAIC-W-2011
SAIC-W-2011
SATR-W-2011
First Calibration witnessed, Random witnessing by SA thereafter.
2.3
Verify Positive Material Identification of Low Alloy, Stainless Steel,

Nickel & Copper Based Materials (As Required)
SAIC-L-2010
SAIC-L-2010
SATR-A-2012
SATR-A-2013
Refer to Note 1 General Notes for SA Inspection responsibility, after

which pre-arranged witness is agreed upon.
3.1
Welding Overlays & Clad Materials
See Remarks
See Remarks
See SATIP No: W-014-01 (As Required)
3.2
Welding Strip Linings
See Remarks
See Remarks
See SATIP N0: W-015-01, etc (As required)
3.3
Welding Special* Corr-Resistant Mat'ls
See Remarks
See Remarks
See SATIP No: W-016-01 (As Required)
3.4
Welding Consumable Control (Storage, Handling, Issue &

Conditioning)
SAIC-W-2032
SAIC-W-2032
Report
Buttering or Weld Build-Up of Joints
SAIC-W-2033
SAIC-W-2033
SATR-W-2006
PROJECT PHASE
1.13
2.0
3.0
3.5
TASK / ACTIVITY
CNTRCTR
REMARKS
SAUDI
ARAMCO
Refer to SATIP No: W-016-01 *Applies to welds of certain P-No 8

Austenitic SS, P-No 10H or Duplex SS, & P-No 40 & above nickel
based alloys in high temp or severe corrosion service (Review scope)
MATERIAL RECEIVING
INSTALLATION
Page 2 of 4
W/H
WELDING CONSUMABLES ISSUANCE REPORT will follow S-EPGC00-1520-0007_R2

Saudi Aramco's responsibilities varies as follows:
a) "W" -for build-up thickness not exceeding 1/3 of the metal thickness
or 10mm whicever is less.
b) "H" - for build-up thickness exceeding the above and requiring
CSD's approval.
Rev 3
COS 06/30/2008
SATIP No.
SATIP-W-011-01
PROJECT TITLE:
ITEM
NO.
3.6
PROJECT PHASE
APPROVED DATE
CONTRACT NUMBER
QUALITY
PROCEDURE
TASK / ACTIVITY
Pre-Welding & Weld Joint Fit-Up Inspection
SAIC-W-2005
QUALITY
RECORD
SAIC-W-2005
SATR-W-2006
11-Dec-13
ASSIGNMENTS
CNTRCTR
W/H
Saudi
Aramco's responsibilities varies as follows:
a) "W" - for Welding on normal services at normal conditions, refer to
Note 1 of the General Notes.
b) "H" - for critical welds, ie.; Tie-Ins, buttering, Hot Taps, NDE-In-Lieu
of Hydro & others as determined by project requirements.
Saudi
Aramco's responsibilities varies as follows:
a) "S" - Generally is a surveillance activity for Saudi Aramco, except in
welding of stainless steel piping and piping in low temp service.
b) "W" - S. Aramco inspects and verifies Heat Input at random or on
routine basis for low temp service and for stainless steel welding.
SAIC-W-2006
SAIC-W-2006
SATR-W-2007
S/W
3.8
Inspect Welds for Socket Joints and Seal Welded Thread Jts. Gap Control
SAIC-W-2037
SAIC-W-2037
3.9
Post-Welding Visual Inspection
SAIC-W-2007
SAIC-W-2007
SATR-W-2007
3.10
Repair of Weld Joints or Base Metal by Welding (Prior to Weld

Acceptance)
SAIC-W-2013
SAIC-W-2013
3.11
Selection of Weld Joints for NDE*

Process Control Proc.)
SAIC-W-2015
SAIC-W-2015 SATR-W-2007
SAIC-M-2012
3.12
Verify NDE Method Application and Evaluation, Documentation &

Reporting of Results*
See Remarks
See Remarks
W/RH*
W/R*
3.13
Database Reporting (per SAEP-1160)

a) Production Weld Status,
b) Welder & Project Repair Rate
c) Welder's Individual Repair Rate
backlog of welds & status
Process* status per weld
SAIC-W-2016
SAIC-W-2016
SATR-W-2013
SATR-W-2018
SATR-W-2019
Page 3 of 4
REMARKS
SAUDI
ARAMCO
In-Process Weld Inspection
d) NDE &
e) Special
MECHANICAL
CONTRACTOR
3.7
(Follow NDE
DISCIPLINE:
SAIC-M-2012 (AWS D1.1) for structural

selection Process daily.
*Refer to the respective NDE SATIP
(SATIP-NDE-UT-01, LPT-01, MPT-01, RT-01, etc):
*Per NDE Special Process Control Procedure
Saudi Aramco reviews on weekly basis
SA Participates in
Rev 3
COS 06/30/2008
SATIP No.
SATIP-W-011-01
PROJECT TITLE:
ITEM
NO.
APPROVED DATE
CONTRACT NUMBER
PROJECT PHASE
TASK / ACTIVITY
QUALITY
PROCEDURE
QUALITY
RECORD
ASSIGNMENTS
CNTRCTR
SAUDI
ARAMCO
Post Weld Heat Treatment Inspection
SAIC-W-2004
SAIC-W-2004
SATR-W-2005
W&R
3.15
Verification of Hardness Testing Application and Results
SAIC-W-2014
SAIC-W-2014
SATR-W-2012
W&R
3.16
Positive Material Identification (PMI) of Deposited Weld for alloyed

materials within the scope of SAES-A-206.
SAIC-L-2010
SAIC-L-2010
SATR-A-2012
SATR-A-2013
W&R
3.17
Modification or Re-Work After Weld Acceptance (Use with SAIC-WSAIC-W-2036

2013)
SAIC-W-2036
PRE-COMMISSIONING
REMARKS
*NOTE: SAUDI ARAMCO CONSIDERS PRESSURE TESTING PART OF CONSTRUCTION, NOT A PRE-COMMISSIONING ACTIVITY
Final Welding Insp & Documentation (Database Report, Welding
Summary/ Record & Weld Map) per SAEP-1160
4.1
MECHANICAL
11-Dec-13
CONTRACTOR
3.14
4.0
DISCIPLINE:
SAIC-W-2008
SAIC-W-2008
SATR-W-2008
Refer to Applicable SATIP for Pressure Testing. Test Pkg

Documentation (per weld) shall contain final welding & special process
acceptance docs.
GENERAL NOTES
NOTICE (SAEP-1160, Section 9.2): Use of Welding and NDT SAICS 9.2.1 One SAIC per day per activity is required for production welding on a daily or continual basis, e.g., fit-up, in-process, and final inspection. Applicable weld numbers must be
entered in the Remarks Box on the appropriate SAIC. 9.2.2 Special welding activities such as branch connections, tie-ins, sleeve installation, hot-tap welding, and temperature tie-ins will require a separate IR per weld per activity in accordance with
the applicable SATIP. 9.2.3 NDT subcontractors must complete NDT Checklists on a daily basis per above but not as an IR with the exception of the start of NDT activities. START OF NEW WELDING ACTIVITIES IN NEW AREAS REQUIRES
NOTIFICATION.
1
The first three incidents of each Inspection or testing activity listed require 100 % participation by Saudi Aramco Site Inspection Personnel. After this period, Saudi Aramco Inspection may adjust the levels of Saudi Aramco participation based
upon the Contractors performance.
Surveillance: QA/QC organization to monitor work in progress without notice from Construction Organization
3
4
Witness:
QA/QC organization shall be notified of the timing of Inspection or test in advance. However, the inspection or test shall be performed as scheduled if the QA/QC
organization representative is not present.
Hold:
QA/QC organization shall be notified of the timing of inspection or test in advance. Inspection or test shall not be carried out without the QA/QC organization
representative in attendance.
If the Main Contractor delegates the assigned responsibility to the Subcontractor, then the Main Contractor will have the same degree of responsibility as assigned to Saudi Aramco.
Hold Point for QC Inspection/ Test
Witness Inspection/Test
Surveillance
LEGEND
R
RH
I
Page 4 of 4
Review of Documents
Review and Approval of Documents
100% Contractor Inspection
SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID - 18-MAY-05 - REV 0 (Standards Cutoff - June 2008)
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER
SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Positive Material Identification (PMI) of Alloy Piping & Alloy
Components (All Applications)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-L-2010
CONTRACT NUMBER
EQUIPMENT ID NUMBER(S)
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
LAYOUT DRAWING NUMBER
REV. NO.
SCHEDULED INSPECTION DATE & TIME
ACTUAL INSPECTION DATE & TIME
SYSTEM ID.
CONTRACTOR INSPECTION LEVEL
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements (Prior to Start of Work) ... See Notes & Attachments 1, 2 & 3
A1
PMI procedure is approved by COMPANY. Controlled copy (latest

revision) is available. See SAIC-L-2004.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Para. 10.1
A2
PMI is integrated with Weld ID system & Database as an element per SPM-G000-1520-0006 Tables. Results are logged/tracked/reported
daily.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
A3
Prior to the commencement of fabrication, the field Fabricator has

performed the following:
A) Fabricator has identified, established & presented to COMPANY for
review (two weeks before fabrication begins) a proposed testing, logging,
identification, and final installation procedure for all components requiring
S-PM-G000-1520PMI testing onsite (fabricated pressured equipment & internal
0008,
components, piping, valves, welds, ETC.).
Section 14
B) Fabricator has a detailed dwg (PMI map) of pressured equipment (All
applications) being fabricated. Map shows alloy material specs, the extent
(100%, etc) of PMI required, providing "field direction".
An efficient system can be a single map (dwg) for NDT, PMI, etc .
C) QMIS/RFI system allows COMPANY to "WITNESS" any PMI tests.
A4
Operator training, Qualification and experience record shall be available

for COMPANY review and approval.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 10.6
A5
An optical emission spectrograph that can be used to check for all

required elements, including carbon (The method gives burn damage on
the product so COMPANY approval shall be required prior to use) or
COMPANY approved (XRF) analysis with a calibrated portable
instrument.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Section 11
A6
Manufacturer's standard calibration samples and certified samples with

the traceability of "known" materials are available for random (spot)
checks. A test record of calibration samples is available
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Section 11
A7
Calibration records for the PMI instrument are available and current as
required by manufacturer's documentation for calibrations.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Section 11
A8
The instrument operator works to his written procedure and has been
trained to use the particular instrument with the procedure. Training was S-PM-G000-1520documented. Certified Operators have demonstrated ability (on approved
0008,
equipment on alloy calibration samples) and tested 100% correct in
Section 11
witness of Company Inspection personnel.
A9
A quarantine area has been established and procedures in place ensure

that rejected components are segregated and properly identified to
prevent reuse.
PMI Extent & Timeliness ... Use Attachments
Page 1 of 22
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 13.3
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION LEVEL
MECH-
CONTRACTOR
PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER
SAUDI ARAMCO ACTIVITY NUMBER
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
EQPT CODE
SAUDI ARAMCO TIP NUMBER
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
WORK PERMIT REQUIRED?
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
B1
PMI is implemented as follows:

A) PMI program covers testing alloy material, pressure-containing
S-PM-G000-1520components in shop and field fabricated equipment and piping
0008,
Base metal testing (See Att. 1) of new materials, repair/replacement of
Section 7,
existing materials (including Tie-Ins)
Section 8
Weld metal testing (See Att. 1) of new welds, repair/replacement
welds (including Tie-Ins) NOTE: Repair Welds = 2 TESTS!
Page 2 of 22
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-L-2010
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B2
PMI requirements are met relative to Exceptions from 100% PMI :

A) Tubes for shell and tube and air-cooled heat exchangers and for fired
process heaters and boilers:
10 tubes or 10%, (the greater) every heat number at random and tested
prior to the installation of tubes into tube sheets.
B) Alloy bolting is randomly 2% PMI examined if:
The project Quality Plan has specific provisions for color coding,
segregation, and visual inspection that were acceptable to Project
Inspection and the proponent organization.
The quality procedures are adequate and are being observed.
Rejected components or failure to follow procedures shall be cause
for PMI examination to be increased to 100% at Inspector discretion. All
replacement components are tested 100% .
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 7.2
B3
A section by section strategy has been worked out for Vessel Internal
Installation where PMI is required for operationally important nonpressure S-PM-G000-1520components such as trays for distillation columns, internal attachment
0008,
welds, certain load bearing supports and hardware. Staging areas are
Section 7
set up and PMI is well planned.
B4
PMI testing is performed during fabrication or immediately prior to

fabrication. PMI testing performed by a manufacturer or supplier
of raw material or loose components is not considered PMI testing
Do timely PMI on receipt & after welding. Best Practice!
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 8.3
B5
One consumable (electrode) from each lot is PMI-tested.

The remainder of the lot is compared to the identified consumable to
verify that the markings of the electrodes/wires are correct .
S-PM-G000-15200008, Section 8
B6
PMI testing of weld metal (e.g. deposited or undiluted weld "buttons") is

performed as an alternative to PMI testing of an electrode or wire sample.
Acceptable only when conducted immediately prior to welding or
during welding process.
B7
Both inside & outside weld surfaces are tested, only where these are
accessible. TEST ROOT PASSES WHENEVER POSSIBLE.
B8
In cases where PMI testing of the completed weld is not possible because
of geometry (small fillet welds & narrow root beads), PMI testing of filler
metal lots & visual inspection of electrode markings are performed to
verify markings of electrodes or wires are correct
B9
If sample removal is used, a written procedure for identification and

traceability to original material is submitted to Saudi Aramco and
approved. Any Overlay Testing (Drillings, etc)
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 11.8
B10
PMI testing of welds shall be done after removal of slag and/or oxide from
the weld surface.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 11.8
B11
The surface to be analyzed is clean bare metal, free of grease or oil, with
a surface finish as specified by instrument manufacturer. Note:Generally
a fresh 60 grit finish & flat surface are req'd for the optical emission
spectrograph, while no minimum surface finish is required for portable
XRF analysis (surface is clean bare metal. )
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 11.9
B12
Elements of the basic alloy materials to be verified is identified prior to

testing. Basic elements are shown in Attachment 1, Table 1.
Attachment 2 is provided to assist. Ensure the following:
A) The Chemical Composition is available for PMI Techs
1) Base Metal ASME II Part A or B or equivalent ASTM spec or
Attachment 3 (UNS Designation listing ASME/ASTM)
2) Weld Metal Spec (AWS Spec or ASME II C Spec)
3) Copy of the WPS (Crosscheck to verify base/weld mat'l)
4) SATR-A-2013 & SATR-A-2014 are available as needed
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 7.5
Page 3 of 22
SAES-A-206,
Para. 7.7.3
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 11.8
SAES-A-206,
Para. 7.7.4
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
MECH-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-L-2010
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B13
Amounts of alloying elements as shown in the material specification has

been determined and listed for the acceptance criteria.
Inspectors know the alloy elements & % range. They can check, verify &
if a result is outside normal range, reverify & report result.
B14
Quarantine area & procedures are established to ensure that any rejected S-PM-G000-1520components are segregated & identified to prevent reuse.
0008,
para 13.3
An ID Tag shall be affixed to any PMI rejected material also.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
MECH-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 12.1
Evaluation of Results (Acceptance Criteria) See Attachment 3 (PMI Failure & Inspection Tips, Lessons Learned)
C1
Attachment 3 Inspection Tips were used!
C2
Alloys shall be acceptable if the alloying elements are each within 10% of S-PM-G000-1520the specified range of values of alloying elements shown in the material
0008,
specification and as determined in Item A11.
para 12.1
C3
Welds with consumables that match, or nearly match, the base metal
composition shall be within 12.5% of the ranges allowed in ASME SEC
IIC for each element.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 12.2
C4
For weld overlays, the chemistry on the surface of overlays shall be in

accordance with the welding consumable specified in the approved
welding procedure.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 12.3
C5
C6
For dissimilar metal alloy welds (other than weld overlays), the effects of
dilution from the different base metals and the filler metal are taken into
account for determining the nominal as-deposited weld metal
composition.
Technicians follow procedure & record results on SATR (Report)
applicable to the work. Engineer & COMPANY review recorded results &
witness "retesting" to verify unacceptable results.
HOLD POINT: Retest to verify suspect/unacceptable results. A
COMPANY Inspector responsible for PMI (if he is not present) is
contacted immediately as agreed upon at the start of PMI Testing
Activities.
LESSONS
LEARNED
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 12.3
Procedure & SPM-G000-15200008, Section 12

HOLD POINT
C7
Rejected components are dispositioned as follows:

A) Retest by Equipment Manufacturer or the Fabricator to obtain a more
accurate analysis (at his own expense) by chemical analysis performed
by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Saudi Aramco
Inspector. The results of the more accurate test method or independent
chemical analysis will govern.
B) Replace the rejected component and PMI the replacement
S-PM-G000-1520C) Rejected items shall be recorded and disposed as per Non Conformity
0008,
Control Procedure S-PM-G000-1520-0005.
Section 13
Technicians follow procedure & record results on SATR (Report)
applicable to the work. Engineer & COMPANY Assigned Inspector
review recorded results & witness "retesting" to verify any unacceptable
results.
HOLD
POINT: Retest to verify unacceptable PMI results. A COMPANY
Assigned Inspector responsible for PMI shall be contacted immediately.
C8
All components, and welds that are found unacceptable shall be marked
immediately with a circled red "X" pending resolution in accordance with
Item C5 above.
Markings of PMI Verified Materials
D1
Paint marking material shall be free of lead, sulfur, zinc, cadmium,

mercury, chlorine, or other halogens.
Low Chloride markers are those with residuals of 50ppm or less.
Page 4 of 22
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 16.1.2
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 16.1.1
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-L-2010
PROJECT TITLE
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
D2
All verified materials with an acceptable analysis are marked with the
letters "PMI" using a certified low-stress stamp. The marking shall be
placed as follows:
Pipe: One mark, 75 mm from one end on the outer surface of the pipe.
This marking shall be in addition to PFI ES-22 reqmts.
Welds: Adjacent to the welder's mark on the weld. (Welds on tubes for
heat transfer equipment shall be marked by either stenciling or vibroetching on the tube sheet).
Fittings and Forgings: Adjacent to the manufacturer's markings.
Valves: Adjacent to the valve manufacturer's markings on bodies and
other pressure parts.
Castings: Adjacent to manufacturer's markings and heat numbers.
Plates: 75 mm from one edge, adjacent to mfg's markings.
Tubes: Stenciled, 300 mm from each end.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 16.1.3
D3
When heat treating is performed after PMI, the identification marking

must be recognizable after heat treatment. PMI markings shall be
transferred when a plate or pipe is cut.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 16.1.4
D4
PMI markings are transferred when a plate or pipe is cut.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
para 16.1.4
Material Identification by Color Coding : The color coding system for

material identification described his intended to help prevent fabricators
from using incorrect alloy material. The principal purpose of color coding
is visual identification during storage and after the components have
been cut for fabrication.
E1
Color coding scheme is prepared and submitted to COMPANY approval.

The Color coding scheme should identify the colors to be used and the
method of color application should follow the procedure stated in S-PMG000-1520-0008, Sec. 16.2.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Para. 16.2
E2
Permanent manufacturers' markings shall not be obscured by color

coding.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Para. 16.2.2
E3
Paints are free of lead, sulfur, zinc, cadmium, mercury, chlorine, and
other halogens.
S-PM-G000-15200008,
Para. 16.2.4
QR NUMBER
MECH-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS:
NOTES: 1. Per S-PM-G000-1520-0006 PMI Reqmts, PMI is tracked on a Per weld Basis and reported as per S-PM-G000-1520-0006. See SAICL-2004. This shall include Repairs, that receive a Unique ID Number or designation. Also, Reporting status & backlog reporting is required.
2) See Attachment 2 for S-PM-G000-1520-0008 PMI PROGRAM REQMTS, ELEMENT TABLE & SA Form 175
3) QC Forms SATR-A-2012 & SATR-A-2013 or approved equivalency shall be utilized with the work
4) BASIC ALLOYS IN TABLE 1 ARE IDENTIFIED BY SPEC & TYPE. ASSURE ENGINEER & INSPECTORS KNOW CRITICAL DETAILS
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0008 PMI PROGRAM REQMTS, ELEMENT TABLE & SA Form 175
Attachment 2 - PMI QUALITY CONCERNS & TABLE 1 ASSISTANCE
Attachment 3 - PMI Failures & Inspection Tips, Lessons Learned
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: 1. S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Positive Material Identification
Contractor / Subcontractor
Saudi Aramco
Subcontractor QC Inspector
COMPANY PMT Representative
Performed Inspection
Work / Rework May Proceed
Name, Initials and Date:
Contractor QC Inspector
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector
Contractor QC Supervisor
Proponent and Others

Quality Record Approved:
T&I Witnessed
Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Page 5 of 22
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-L-2010
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
MECH-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
*Person Responsible for Completion of Quality Work / Test
Y = YES
Page 6 of 22
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-L-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0008 PMI PROGRAM REQMTS
Page 7 of 22
QR NUMBER
PIPING-
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0008 PMI PROGRAM REQMTS & ELEMENT TABLE
Page 8 of 22
Page 9 of 22
Page 10 of 22
Page 11 of 22
Page 12 of 22
Page 13 of 22
Page 14 of 22
Page 15 of 22
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-L-2010
MECH-
Attachment 2 - PMI QUALITY CONCERNS & TABLE 1 ASSISTANCE
NOTICE TO QUALITY MANAGERS & INSPECTORS

Carbon Steel Substitutions in Low Alloy Steel Systems
In determining the likelihood of material nonconformances, it is worth noting that historically the greatest number of
material nonconformances with serious consequences have involved carbon steel components in low alloy steel
(e.g., 1-14Cr1/2Mo, 2-14Cr1 Mo, 5 Cr12Mo, 9 Cr1 Mo) piping systems. There have been relatively fewer
nonconformances in stainless steel and nonferrous (e.g. Monel, Inconel) systems because of appearance and
weldability issues. (API 578, Section 4). This includes Low Temp service electrode (1% Ni) improper substitutions.
Tacking of SS using incorrect electrodes is another serious & common problem.Use Training & Vigilance.
Requirement: Extremely Tight controls of Welding Consumables for Low-Alloys & Nickel based alloys.
Many of these electrodes look alike and have similar designations. E-7018, E7018-1, E7018M, per AWS A5.1 can
can be mixed by the poorly trained with AWS A5.1 Low Alloy E-7018A1 Carbon Moly or E-7018 B2L Cr moly, etc).
When welding is conducted, one new electrode or wire sample from each lot or package of alloy weld rod shall be
positively identified. Remainder of the lot shall be checked (markings) and measures taken to assure substitution
of electrodes is "PREVENTED". Preventive Measures include training for welders (color code & electrode familiarity).
Guide for Usage of This Table

NOTE: THIS IS NOT A USER "FRIENDLY" TABLE FOR INSPECTION & ENGINEERS ALIKE.
It is difficult for Inspectors or PMI technicians to tell what materials "FALL INTO WHAT CATEGORY".
Not surprisingly, many tests are performed incorrectly. Example: Can you identify "stabilized SS" from other SS?
321 SS and others utilize Titanium & Niobium to "stabilize" the SS during manufacturing process.
Method to Evaluate PMI Results
WORK SHALL BE DONE WITH A COPY OF ALL APPLICABLE SPECS (CHEMICAL COMPOSITION CHARTS)
USE ASME SEC II PART A (Ferrous Base Matls), B (Non-Ferrous Base Matls), C (Welding Consumables)
COMPARE ELEMENTS IN CHEMICAL COMPOSITION TABLES (ASME II C HAS 3 PARTS) TO TEST RESULTS
Base matl per ASME II, A or B) is acceptable if each alloy element is within 10% of the specified range.
Weld Metal per ASME II C is acceptable if each alloying element is within 12.5% of the specified range.
Note: Dilution can occur when composition of base matl (ASME II Part A, B) & Weld Metal (ASME II Part C) varies.
Page 16 of 22
Attachment 2 - SAES-A-206 PMI QUALITY CONCERNS & TABLE 1 ASSISTANCE
PMI Table for Engineers, PMI Technicians & Welding Inspectors on IK Projects
Matl / Grade
UNS/Spec
& P-No
Cr Ni
Mo
Nb
Ti
Cu
Zn
Al
Fe
BASE MATERIALS PER SAES-L-132 USED ON SA PROJECTS IN BOLD LETTERS

WELDING CONSUMABLES CHECK WPS & USE ASME SECTION II PART C
Chrome-Molybdenum, Carbon-Molybdenum, Manganese-Molybdenum
12Cr12Mo
(Grade P-2)
C12Mo
(Grade P-1)
1-14Cr12Mo
(Grade P11)
1Cr12Mo
(Grade P12)
A 335
P- No 3
NOTE: NO BACK-PURGE NECESSARY FOR WELDS
A 335
P- No 4
NOTE: NO BACK-PURGE NECESSARY FOR WELDS
2-14Cr1Mo
(Grade P-22)
3Cr1Mo
(Grade P-21)
A 335
P-No 5A
5Cr12Mo
(Grade P-5)
9 Cr, 1 Mo
(Grade P-9)
A 335
P-No 5B
A 335
P-No 5B
NOTE: NO BACK-PURGE NECESSARY FOR WELDS.

2-1/4 Cr = Limit for No Back Purge Requirement.
3% Cr = CSD will determine need for Back Purge If any
Note: 3% Cr is rarely used if ever on SA Projects.
NOTE: BACK-PURGE ALL WELDS ABOVE 2-1/4% Cr
5% Cr = Back Purge Necessary
NOTE: BACK-PURGE ALL WELDS ABOVE 2-1/4% Cr
9% Cr = Back Purge Necessary
Matl / Grade
UNS/Spec
& P-No
Cr Ni
Mo
Nb
Ti
Cu
Zn
Al
Fe
Copper Based Alloys (Note: This is not a Nickel Alloy, UNS prefix designation is C)
90/10 CuNi
(Gr. B466/67)
70/30 CuNi
(Gr B467)
C70600
P-No34
C70600
P-No34
Regular Carbon Grade SS

304
S30400
X
X
X
309
S30900
X
X
X
310
S31000
X
X
X
316
S31600
X
X
X
317
S31700
X
X
X
NOTE: Any of the above with an L or H Suffix requires the Carbon Content C also. These are Low & High
Carbon Steels. THEY ARE CHECKED FOR CARBON CONTENT.
TIP: E-LIBRARY ASME FOLDER HAS UNS FOLDER & TABLES & DESIGNATES ALL ELEMENTS
FOR EASY CHEM COMP ASSESSMENT, INCL. CARBON & STABILIZED STEEL DESIGNATIONS
Stabilized Stainless Steels ... may include 347 ... High Temp Service
321
(stabilized SS)
S32100
SMO254
S31254
Super Austenitic (Corrosion resistant) & Austenitic-Ferritic SS

C 0.020 max, Cr 19.50-20.50, Cu 0.50-1 .O0,
X
X
X
Mn 1 .O0 max, Mo 6.00-6.50 max,
S 0.010 max, Si 0.80 max, N 0.180-0.220,
Ni 17.50-18.50 P 0.030
C 0.030 max Cr 21.0-23.0, Mn 2.00 max
Mo 2.50-3.50, N 0.08-0.20 Ni 4.50-6.50,
P 0.030 max S 0.020 max Si 1 .O0 max
Austenitic Cr-NiMo-Cu-N
Stainless Steel
2205 Duplex
SS-P-No 10H
S31803
C 0.08 max Cr 17.00-19.00 Mn 2.00 max

Ni 9.00-12.00 P 0.045 max S 0.030 max
Si 1 .O0 max Ti 5XC min
(Austen-Ferritic)
Cr-Ni-Mo-N
Page 17 of 22
Attachment 2 - SAES-A-206 PMI QUALITY CONCERNS & TABLE 1 ASSISTANCE
PMI Table for Engineers, PMI Technicians & Welding Inspectors on IK Projects
Nickel Based Alloys ... Check for Nickel , Iron, Copper, Chromium, Molybdenum
Hastelloy B2
or Alloy B-2
(NiMo = B
619)
Alloy 600 or
Inconel 600
Ni-Cr
N10665
P- No 44
N06600
Alloy 400 or
Monel 400
Ni-Cu Alloy
Alloy 20 NiFe-Cr Alloy
(Carpenter
20Cb3)
Alloy C-276
(NiMoCr =
B366 or B564
N04400
Alloy C-22 or
Hastelloy C22 (NiCr-Mo)
B619 or B622)
Alloy 625
Ni-Cr-Mo-Cb
(Nb)
N06022
P- No 44
Alloy 800
Fe-Ni-Cr Alloy
N08800
Alloy 825 or
Incoloy 825
Ni-Fe-Cr Alloy
N08825
N08020
P-No 45
N10276
P-No 44
N06625
C 0.02 max Co 1 .O max Cr 1 .O max Fe 2.0 max Mn 1 .O max Mo 26.0-30.0

Ni Remaining P 0.04 S 0.03 max Ci 0.10 max ASME SB333; SB335; SB366; SB619; SB622; SB626; SFA5.14 (ERNiMo-7)
ASTM B333; B335; B366; B619; B622; B626 AWS A5.14 (ERNiMO-7)
C 0.15 max Cr 14.00-17.00 Cu 0.50 max Fe 6.00-10.00 Mn 1.00 max
Ni 72.0 min S 0.015 max Ci 0.50 max ASME SB163; SB166; SB167; SB168; SB564 ASTM B163; B166; B167; B168; B366;
B516; B517; B564; B751 Other: NACE MR-01-75
C 0.3 max Cu Remaining Fe 2.50 max Mn 2.00 max Ni 63.00-70.00
S 0.024 max Si 0.50 max - ASME SB127; SB163; SB164; SB165; SB564 ASTM B127;
B163; B164; B165; B366; B564 Other: NACE MR-01-75
C 0.07 max Cb 8xC-1 .O0 Cr 19.00-21.00 Co 3.00-4.00 Fe Remaining
Mn 2.00 max Mo 2.00-3.00 Ni 32.00-38.00 P 0.045max S 0.035 max Si 1.00 max
ASME SB462; SB463; SB464 ASTM A358; 8366; 8462; 8463; 8464; 8468; 8471; 8472;
8473; 8474; 8475; 8729 Other: NACE MR-01-75
C 0.02 max Co 2.5 max Cr 14.5-16.5 Fe 4.0-7.0 Mn 1.0 max Mo 15.0-17.0
Ni Remaining P 0.030 max C 0.030 max Si 0.08 max V 0.35 max W 3.0-4.5 ASME SB366; SB574; SB575; SB619; SB622; SB626; SFA5.14 (ERNiCrMo-4)
ASTM B366; B564; B574; B575; B619; B622; B626; F467 (276); F468 (276)
AWS A5.14 (ERNiCrMo-4) NACE MR-01-75
C 0.015 max Co 2.5 max Cr 20.0-22.5 Fe 2.0-6.0 Mn 0.50 max Mo 12.5-14.5
Ni Remaining P 0.02 max C 0.02 max Ci 0.08 max V 0.35 max W 2.5-3.5 ASME SB366; SB574; SB575; SB619; SB622; SB626; ASTM B366; B564; B574; B575;
B619; B622; B626 AWS A5.14 (ERNiCrMo-10) NACE MR01-75
AI 0.40 max C 0.10 max Cb 3.15-4.15 Cr 20.0-23.0 Fe 5.0 max Mn 0.50 max Mo 8.010.0 Ni Remaining P 0.015 max S 0.015 max Si 0.50 max Ti 0.40 max
ASME SB443; SB444; SB446; SFA5.14 (ERNiCrMo-3) ASTM B366; B443; B444; B446;
B564; B704; B705; B751 AWS A5.14 (ERNiCrMo-3) Other: NACE MR-OI-75
AI 0.15-0.60 C 0.10 max Cr 19.0-23.0 Cu 0.75 max Fe rem Mn 1.5 max
Ni 30.0-35.0 P 0.045 max S 0.015 max Si 1.0 max Ti 0.15-0.60 ASME SB163; SB407; SB408; SB409; SB564 ASTM A240; A358; B163; B366; B407;
B408; B409; B514; B515; B564 Other: NACE MR-01-75 ... ASTM A240 lists N08800
AI 0.2 max C 0.05 max Cr 19.5-23.5 Cu 1.5-3.0 Fe Remaining Mn 1 .O max Mo 2.5-3.5
Ni 38.0-46.0 P 0.03 max S 0.03 max Ci 0.5 max Ti 0.6-1.2 - ASME SB163; SB423;
SB424; SB425 ASTM B163; B423; B424; B425; B564; B704; B705 - NACE MR-01-75
Page 18 of 22
Attachment 2 - SAES-A-206 PMI PROGRAM REQMTS & ELEMENT TABLE (API 582 Guide)
Page 19 of 22
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-L-2010
QR NUMBER
MECH-
Attachment 3 - PMI FAILURES, INSPECTION TIPS, & PREVENTION (LESSONS LEARNED)

1. NEVER ALLOW CuNi & SS (316, etc) to be done in same shop without careful consumable segregation.
2. CONSUMABLES & GRINDERS/BRUSHES/FILES MUST BE "COLOR CODED" FOR EACH DIFFERENT MATL
3. NEVER ALLOW grinders used on CuNi to be used on SS (316, etc). This can cause PMI failures/cracks.
4. ALWAYS VERIFY Cu (Copper) content in SS when performing PMI If ANY possibility of mixing exists.
5. Cu (Copper) content in SS (316, etc) SHOULD NEVER EXCEED 0.7% IN ANY CASE. Lessons Learned.
6. ALWAYS USE A
MAGNET TO CHECK RECEIVED SS HARWARE & SS MATERIALS & WELDS
7. 300 SERIES STAINLESS STEEL (High % Cr & Ni) DOES NOT ATTRACT A MAGNET (NON-MAGNETIC)
8. 400 SERIES STAINLESS STEEL (High % Cr & 1% or Low % Nickel) IS "VERY SLIGHTLY" MAGNETIC
9. Electroplated CS (Counterfeits substituted for SS) are strongly magnetic along with zinc plated items.
10. MARKINGS ON MATERIALS / HARDWARE / BOLTING ARE OFTEN WRONG (COUNTERFEIT ITEMS)
11. COUNTERFEIT HARDWARE IS COMMON NOW IN SAUDI ARAMCO IN ALL CONSTRUCTION DISCIPLINES
12. NEVER "ASSUME" VENDOR PMI TESTS ARE CORRECT, AS MOST PMI IS "VERIFIED" NOT WITNESSED.
13. PMI SHOULD BE DONE ON 100% OF ALL FITTINGS & PIPE "BEFORE FABRICATION" (TEST WELD ONLY)
14. IF MATERIALS ARRIVE WITHOUT REQD "PMI OK" MARKINGS PER SAES-A-206, REJECT THEM/VERIFY.
MAGNET TO FIND MIXED SS HARDWARE.

16. ON SKID MOUNTED EQUIPMENT, USE A MAGNET TO FIND MIXED SS MATLS / HARDWARE.
17. ON RECEIVED FABRICATED PIPING, MAGNETS CAN IDENTIFY MIXED CONSUMABLES.
18. NEVER "ASSUME" VENDOR PMI TESTS ARE CORRECT, USE A MAGNET ANYWAY.
15. ON VESSEL INTERNAL INSTALLATIONS, USE A
19. ALWAYS KNOW THE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION REQUIRED BEFORE INSPECTING IT.
20. ALWAYS KNOW THE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION MARKINGS REQUIRED BEFORE INSPECTING IT.
21. ALWAYS KNOW THE MATERIAL SPECIFICATION MAGNETIC PROPERTIES BEFORE INSPECTING IT.
22. ALWAYS KNOW YOUR CHEMICAL COMPOSITION REQUIREMENTS BEFORE REVIEWING RESULTS.
23. WHEN WELDING WITH 1% Ni or OTHER ALLOY ELECTRODES, PMI MUST BE DONE.
24. WHEN ANY POSSIBILITY OF CONSUMABLE MIXING EXISTS, EVALUATE / REVIEW OTHER ELEMENTS
25. THE # 1 CAUSE OF PMI FAILURES = CS CONSUMABLE (P-1) MIXING WITH LOW ALLOY STEEL (P-3/4/5)
Page 20 of 22
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012
Inspection of Structural Welding (Per AWS D1.1)

PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
MH's SPENT
PASS
FAIL
N/A
General Requirements
A1
Procedure (Prequalified per AWS D1.1 2004 or earlier edition) has been
reviewed and approved for application by Project Inspection.
Welders have valid JCCs and are qualified for structural welding.
12-SAMSS-007,
Para. 7.5
A2
Materials to be welded have been received & inspected and are properly
identified & traceable to Certified Mill Test Reports or Certificate of
Compliance (Specification). SAIC-M-2003
12-SAMSS-007,
Material
Specifications
A3
Approved Drawings are available for the work and provide detailed
instruction for the weld joint & weld dimensions.
Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared per the AISC
documents listed in 12-SAMSS-007.
12-SAMSS-007,
Para. 6.4.1
& Para. 7.10
Pre-Welding Inspection ... Assumes Equipment Checks are accepted for Associated Welding (Piping, Vessels, etc)
B1
Preparation of Base Metal & cleanliness met AWS Section 5.15:

A) Cleaning removed any scale, oils, rust, foreign matter (Clean)
B) Joint Preparation exhibited good workmanship (free of notches)
C) Checks for laminations
Observance of smoke with objectionable fumes may indicate welding is
being done on fouled surfaces (Cleaning inadequate)
B2
Joint alignment for Butt Welds shall be 10% offset or 1/8" (3mm)
whichever is smaller. Stiffener & gusset plates shall be fitted per dwg
tolerances (max gap 1/16" or 2mm) See Attachment 4.
B3
Welding environment is acceptable for welding. Attachment 2.

Similar rules for Piping are followed (Same Procedure)
B4
Preheat has been performed on damp steel & as req'd based on

WPS & AWS D1.1 Preheat Table 3.2 Reqmts for steel type.
This preheat & all subsequent minimum interpass temps shall be
maintained during the welding operation for a distance at least equal to
the thickness of the thickest welded part (not less than 3 in. [75 mm]) in
all directions from the point of welding.
B5
Electrode selected was based on WPS and AWS Table 3.1.

Consumable Control Practices associated with Pipe & Equipment
Welding are followed. Cellulose Electrodes (E6010) are not used.
AWS D1.1,
Para. 5.3 &
Table 3.1
B6
MEASURES TO MAINTAIN EFFECTIVE TOLERANCES FOR ASSY &

PREVENT WELDING DISTORTION have been taken on the structural
items being welded. Such measures include the use of strongbacks &
carefully sequenced welding for "Best Practice".
A
final assessment for welding distortion shall be required
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.23
B7
WELDERS HAVE RECEIVED INSTRUCTION ON FIGURE 5.4

Workmanship & weld Profiles shall be per Attachment 3.
A final assessment for welding workmanship is performed.
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.24
In-Process Welding Inspection
C1
Tack welds shall be subject to the same quality reqmts as the final welds
and shall exhibit good workmanship. Tack welds that are incorporated
into the final weld shall be cleaned thoroughly. Multiple-pass tack welds
shall have cascaded ends.
Page 1 of 29
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.22
& Section 5.23
AWS D1.1,
Para. 5.12
AWS D1.1,
Para. 5.6 &
Para. 3.2
(Preheat Tables)
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.18
TRAVEL TIME
12-SAMSS-007,
Para. 7.5
Attachment 2
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
MECH -
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED QR NUMBER
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012

PROJECT TITLE
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C2
Weld Profiles - All welds, except as otherwise allowed below, shall be

free from cracks, overlap, and the unacceptable profile discontinuities
exhibited in Figure 5.4. (Butts & Fillets)
Weld Profiles are acceptable per Attachment 3.
Butt weld reinforcement does not exceed 3mm
Grinding to achieve requirements is acceptable.
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.18
C3
In addition, any strikes, gouges, and other indications of careless

workmanship (such as surface porosity) shall be removed by grinding.
12-SAMSS-007,
Para. 7.6 (a)
FINAL Welding Inspection & Acceptance
D1
Repairs were identified and treated per the requirements of Attachment

2.
D2
Any NDE required was selected, completed and accepted.

See Attachment 5.
NDE was witnessed and completed reports are available.
D3
Visible & measured welding distortion is within AWS D1.1 tolerances

listed in Attachment 4.
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.23
D4
VISUAL EXAMINATION CRITERIA (Use Attachment 3):

A) Weld Profiles are acceptable per Attachment 3.
B) Table 6.1 Visual acceptance criteria was met
8 Imperfections are listed. Welds were gauged & accepted
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.18
MECH -
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
AWS D1.1,
Section 5.26
12-SAMSS-007,
Para. 7.6 (a)
AWS D1.1,
Sect 6
REMARKS:
NOTES: 1. This Checklist is efficiently streamlined. The intention of this checklist is to accompany associated Process welding & meet code.
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - ASTM A6 / ASTM A6M Structural Steel Tolerance Tables (Str. Shapes, Flanged Sections)
Attachment 2 - Structural Steel Pre-Welding, In-Process Inspection & Repair Requirements (AWS D1.1)
Attachment 3 - Structural Steel Welding Acceptance Criteria (AWS D1.1)
Attachment 4 - Structural Steel Welding Reqmts & Tolerances at Saudi Aramco (Per AWS D1.1)
Attachment 5 - Structural Steel Welding Requirements, Selection of NDE (AWS D1.1)
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS:
2- 12-SAMSS-007 -- Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel, (3 September 2006)
3- 12-SAMSS-008 -- Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel, 28 January 2004
4- PIP STS05130 -- Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification, February 2002
5- ASTM A6/A6M -- Standard Spec for General Reqmts for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes & Sheet Piling, 1 March 2004
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 29
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
MECH -
Attachment - ASTM A6 / ASTM A6M Structural Steel Tolerance Tables (Str. Shapes, Flanged Sections)
Page 3 of 29
Page 4 of 29
Page 5 of 29
Page 6 of 29
Page 7 of 29
Page 8 of 29
Page 9 of 29
Page 10 of 29
Page 11 of 29
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012
11-Dec-13
MECH Attachment 2 - Structural Steel Pre-Welding, In-Process Inspection & Repair Requirements (AWS D1.1)
Joint preparation & cleanliness meets the detailed requirements of Section 5.15 below:
INSPECTION POINTS (VERIFY)

1. Observance of smoke with objectionable fumes may indicate welding is being done on fouled surfaces.
2. Joint Prep method, i.e., thermal cutting, gouging, and grinding results in a workmanlike profile & finish.
5.15.4.4 Gouge or Notch Limitation: Roughness exceeding these values & notches or gouges not more than 3/16
in. [5 mm] deep on other wise satisfactory surfaces shall be removed by machining or grinding. Notches or gouges
exceeding 3/16 in. [5 mm] deep may be repaired by grinding if the nominal cross-sectional area is not reduced by
more than 2%. Ground or machined surfaces shall be fared to the original surface with a slope not exceeding one in
ten. Cut surfaces & adjacent edges shall be left free of slag. In thermal-cut surfaces, occasional notches or gouges
may, with approval of the Engineer, be repaired by welding.
3. Any Mill Discontinuities are resolved per AWS D1.1, dispositioned & repaired as per Table 5.4 below.
POINT 1: Welding Joint preparation & cleanliness meets AWS D1.1 requirements ........... PASS or FAIL
Page 12 of 29
Welding Environment & Preheat is acceptable per requirements of Section 5.12 below:
INSPECTION POINTS TO WATCH

A quick look at this and you can see where the 8 Km / hour wind rule in SAES-W-011/012/etc comes from.
BIG POINT OF DIFFERENCE (OMISSION): NO MENTION IS MADE OF THE SMAW PROCESS.
SO ... WELDERS CAN WELD SMAW (AWS D1.1 APPLICATIONS ONLY) IN WINDS ABOVE 8 KM/Hr ... RIGHT?
ANSWER: AS LONG AS WELD QUALITY MEETS ATTACHMENT 2 FOR FILLET & GROOVE WELDS AND THE
WELDING PROCESS CONTROL PROCEDURE DOES NOT SPECIFY A MAXIMUM LIMIT FOR WIND SPEED.
REQUIREMENT: With SMAW, unshielded work shall not be subject to excessive* arc fluctuations.
* This varies from welder to welder depending on skill level in wind & how wide his butt is to keep wind off the work.
WINDBORNE DUST/SAND (ELEMENT OF HIGH WINDS) SHALL ALSO REQUIRE PROTECTIVE MEASURES.
5.6 Preheat and Interpass Temperatures
Base metal shall be preheated, if required, to temperature not less than minimum value listed on WPS (see 3.5 for
prequalified WPS limitations & Table 4.5 for qualified WPS essential variable limitations). For combinations of base
metals, the minimum preheat shall be based on the highest minimum preheat. This preheat and all subsequent
minimum interpass temperatures shall be maintained during the welding operation for a distance at least equal to the
thickness of thickest welded part but not less than 75 mm all directions from point of welding. Minimum interpass
temperature requirements shall considered equal to the preheat requirements, unless otherwise indicated on WPS.
PREHEAT & INTERPASS TEMPS SHALL BE CHECKED JUST PRIOR TO INITIATING ARC FOR EACH PASS.
THIS MEANS EACH WELDER KNOWS THE PREHEAT REQMTS & HAS THE CORRECT TEMP CRAYON (ETC)
POINT 2: Welding Environment & Preheat meets AWS D1.1 requirements ........... PASS or FAIL
Page 13 of 29
Welding Consumables (Section 5.3):
5.3.2 SMAW Electrodes. Electrodes for SMAW shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWS A5.1,
Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding, or to the requirements of AWS A5.5,
Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding.
NO SIGNIFICANT CHANGES EXIST FOR CONSUMABLE CONTROL & CONSUMABLES USED FOR PIPING
Utilize the applicable checklists for Consumable Control & an approved Procedure detailing controls.
POINT 3: Welding Consumables & Controls followed an approved procedure ........... PASS or FAIL
Welding Execution (Procedure):

Welding Activities shall follow an approved or pre-approved WPS that has been submitted to SA PID & approved
per the requirements of SAEP-352.
Where details of welding are unknown (unspecified), ENGINEER & QUALITY MANAGER shall make these KNOWN
This shall be done to provide adequate Field Instructions to Inspectors & Welders. Quality Mgr. Action.
NDT Specs (Section 6, Part C & See Repairs Below):

SECTION 6 Part C Acceptance Criteria (Visual & NDT)
6.7 Scope - Acceptance criteria for visual and NDT inspection of tubular connections and statically and cyclically
loaded nontubular connections are described in Part C. The extent of examination & acceptance criteria shall
be specified in the contract documents on information furnished to the bidder. Quality Mgr. Action!
Allowable Repairs (Summary)
Page 14 of 29
Page 15 of 29
Page 16 of 29
Page 17 of 29
Page 18 of 29
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012
12/11/2013
MECH Attachment 3 - Structural Steel Welding Acceptance Criteria (AWS D1.1)
AWS D1.1 --- 5.24 Weld Profiles - All welds, except as otherwise allowed below, shall be free from cracks, overlap,
and the unacceptable profile discontinuities exhibited in Figure 5.4. FILLET SIZE SHALL BE MEASURED (GAGE).
5.24.1 Fillet Welds: The faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, flat, or slightly concave as shown in Figure 5.4
Figure 5.4(C) shows UNACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES. THESE ARE NEVER* ALLOWED AT SA.
* Inspectors accepting such welds are subject to "Retraining for Field Performance".
* Inspectors shall identify welders with Poor Workmanship early in the Welding Process
5.24.3 Convexity:. Except at outside welds in corner joints, the convexity C of a weld or individual surface bead
shall not exceed the values given in Figure 5.4.(1/16" to 3/16" per Table) --> FILLET SIZES SHALL BE SPECIFIED
IF FILLET SIZE IS UNKNOWN, INSPECTOR ENSURES ENGINEERING DIRECTION IS PROVIDED AS NEEDED.
5.14 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes - The minimum fillet weld size, except for fillet welds used to reinforce groove
welds, shall be as shown in Table 5.8. The minimum fillet weld size shall apply in all cases, unless the design
drawings specify welds of a larger size. AGAIN, DESIGN DRAWINGS SHALL SPECIFY A FILLET SIZE!
CAUTION: MANDATORY HOLD POINT FOR DWG & SPECIFICATION CHECK FOR CORRECT FILLET SIZE
Page 19 of 29

AWS D1.1 - Section 6.9 (Visual Inspection)
All welds shall be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if the criteria of Table 6.1 are satisfied.
LOAD TYPE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SPECIFIED (PROVIDE ADEQUATE EVALUATION CRITERIA)
Page 20 of 29

5.24.4 Groove or Butt Welds: Groove welds shall be made with minimum face reinforcement unless otherwise
specified. In the case of butt and corner joints, face reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm] in height.
All welds shall have a gradual transition to the plane of base-metal surfaces with transition areas free from undercut
except as allowed by this code. Figure 5.4(D) shows typically acceptable groove weld profiles in butt joints.
Figure 5.4(E) shows typically unacceptable weld profiles for groove weld butt joints. *NEVER ALLOWED.
Butt Joint Misalignment (5.22.3)
5.23.8 - FLANGE WARPAGE & TILT (WELDING DISTORTION)

1% of total flg width or 1/4" (6mm) whichever is greater & "Exception"
THEY WELDED IT & NOW IT LOOKS LIKE A BANANA*

* Splice welds and welding of gusset plates and other members shall require proper use of "strongbacks" and
other means to prevent distortion during welding. This is critical when welding will be concentrated in one side
or area of a member. WELD PASS SEQUENCE CAN ALSO REDUCE DISTORTION.
See Section 5.23 for applications other than Columns & Trusses (Beams)
Page 21 of 29
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012
11-Dec-13
MECH Attachment 4 - Structural Steel Welding Reqmts & Tolerances at Saudi Aramco (Per AWS D1.1)
Erection Tolerances are in Attachment 1 (Per AISC Code). This is for Information Only.
AWS D1.1 WELDING DISTORTION TOLERANCES ARE LISTED BELOW (& 12-SAMSS-007 BASIS)
Page 22 of 29
Page 23 of 29
Page 24 of 29
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-M-2012
12/11/2013
MECH Attachment 5 - Structural Steel Welding Requirements, Selection of NDE (AWS D1.1)
Mill Discontinuities are resolved per AWS D1.1, NDE dispositioned & repaired as per Table 5.4 below.
AWS D1.1 Allowable Repairs (Note NDE Required)
NOTICE: ENGINEER & SA AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR* APPROVAL REQ'D. (AWS D1.1)
Page 25 of 29
Mislocated Holes (Common Repair in Plants)
526.5 (1) = VT, MT or PT .... 526.5 (2) = VT, MT or PT & RT (depending on location, severity) ... 526.5 (3) = VT, MT or PT & RT
Measurement shall be per calipers or Ultrasonic Thickness Meter if excess weld metal removal is checked
REPAIR OF WELD DEFECTS* FOUND DURING NDT(*Prohibited Discontinuity)
AWS NDT Specs (Section 6, Part C)

Notice: NDE shall be clearly defined (as stated in this Attachment or as agreed upon).
NDT SHALL BE SPECIFED (Noted in WPS) - SUBMITTED TO SA INSPECTOR FOR APPROVAL.
UT, MT, PT, RT shall be performed per detailed requirements & Acceptance Criteria Tables of this section.
BEAM & COLUMN SPLICING WELD REPAIRS (NOTICE TO THE CONTRACTOR)

1. Contractor shall have approved WPS & Repair Procedure. Cut edges shall be examined* for discontinuities.
2. Contractor shall specify 100% CJP (complete joint penetration) RT Quality welds as detailed in Procedure.
3. RT OR UT SHALL BE SPECIFIED BY ENGINEER AT 100% on butt-welded load bearing* members.
*Main frames and any extensions that are part of the lateral load carrying system such as splice welds for horizontal
piperack beams or vertical columns supporting piping loads in SA Plants. Other shapes (angles, etc) in non-load
bearing secondary applications are spliced with 100% CJP (10% RT Optional). Visual Exam = OK With Hold Points.
4. Contractor shall specify flush, smooth surface after welding per 5.24.4.1 "as required" for service application.
5. Contractor Inspection (NDE HOLD POINTS): Perform 100% VISUAL ON FIT-UP, ROOT PASS, FINAL
6. Contractor shall notify Authorized SA Inspector of ANY repair or splice weld BEFORE welding.
7. Contractor shall perform supplemental NDT based on Visual Exam (suspect areas, laminations, discontinuities).
QA/QC MGRs & ENGINEER ARE RESPONSIBLE TO IMPLEMENT ABOVE REQUIREMENTS ON PROJECTS.
Page 26 of 29
Page 27 of 29

12-SAMMS-007 WELDING INSPECTION REQMTS
Page 28 of 29
12-SAMMS-008 CORRECTION OF ERRORS (REPAIR PROCEDURE SHALL COPY & PASTE ELEMENTS)
PIP STS05130 CORRECTION OF ERRORS (REPAIR PROCEDURE TO INCLUDE)
Page 29 of 29
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Review WPS & Process Control Procedure (Plant Piping)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2001
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
FAIL
Instructions for Approval (Responsibilities) ... Quality Managers see Notes 1 & 2 at end of this checklist
A1
COMPANY previously approved WPS(s) & any new or proposed WPS(s) S-PM-G000-1520intended for project use are compiled into a Welding Master Set (WMS)
0011,
for Projects.
Para. 9.1.1 & SFollow S-PM-G000-1520-0006, Appendix 1 instruction. See
PM-G000-15200006
Attachment 1.
Appendix 1
Allow adequate time (in weeks) for COMPANY review & approval stage.
A2
A3
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.1.1 & SPM-G000-15200006
Appendix 1
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
9.1.2 &
Para. 9.2.1
A4
Weld & Line Description Table (Attach. B) lists:

A) Matls, thickness, & weld joint type for individual line designations.
B) A welding procedure shall be listed for each different weld type and
S-PM-G000-1520line designation.
0011,
Para.
C) All base materials (by spec, grade, P-No, Piping Diameter range) and
9.1.3
wall thicknesses to be used shall be included in the Weld Table.
D) Weld Table shall only be reviewed with WPSs and PQRs and and viceversa.
A5
Each Weld Table shall be completed & show all line designations,
Material, Joints & Welding procedure to be used for the entire complete
job or contract.
Note : Line
S-PM-G000-1520Service designation ("sour", non-sour, Internal FBE Coated, Impact
0011,
Para.
9.1.4
tested CS, Severe Cycle or Category M service, & other special service
considerations such as Hardness Testing & PWHT shall be so
designated in the Attachment B . Utilize the Remarks Section as needed.
A6
Welding shall not commence until the welding package has been
approved for application by COMPANY Inspector & returned to
the fabricator. Any welding prior to the approval of the welding
package is subject to rejection at the sole option of COMPANY
Inspector. Any rework required as a result of this rejection shall be at the
fabricator's expense.
A7
After approval by COMPANY Inspector, fabricator shall issue copies of

S-PM-G000-1520the approved Welding Procedures & Weld Table to COMPANY and PMT 0011,
Para.
prior to the start of fabrication.
9.1.6
A8
Approval of welding procedures shall not be construed as authority for

deviation from listed specifications or requirements of relevant
codes and standards and shall not relieve the contractor, fabricator, or
vendor from correcting any deviations.
Page 1 of 21
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
9.1.5
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
9.1.7
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
Individual WPS & PQR are prepared using correct COMPANY Forms:
A) Attachment A - S-PM-G000-1520-0011/SAES-W-012 Welding
Procedure Spec (See attachment A, PAGES A1, A2, A3, A4, A5)
B) Attachment B - S-PM-G000-1520-0011/SAES-W-012, Weld & Line
Description Table (See ATTACHMENT B).
Note:COMPANY performs technical approval of all WPS & indicates such
approval on each and every page of the WPS (requirement).
COMPANY Assigned Inspector performs approval based on the intended
WPS application. See Section C for specific checks relative to the WPS
application.
All WPSs & PQRs conform to the latest edition of ASME IX.
Procedures that comply with a previous edition but not the current
edition of the relevant Code are not acceptable. Procedures no
longer conforming to the latest Code edition shall be revised,
requalified and resubmitted for COMPANY approval.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
SYSTEM ID.
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2001
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Welding Master Set Preparation & Approval (Instructions)
Page 3 of 21
Page 4 of 21
Page 5 of 21
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2001
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
SAES-W-011/012 WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (ATTACHMENT A, PAGES A1, A2, A3, A4, A5)
Page 7 of 21
Page 8 of 21
Page 9 of 21
Page 10 of 21
Page 11 of 21
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2001
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
SAES-W-011/012 WELD & LINE DESCRIPTION TABLE (ATTACHMENT B)
Page 12 of 21
WELD-
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2001
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Attachment 2 - WPS PROCEDURE VARIABLES (S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Section 9.4, 9.5 & 9.6)
Page 13 of 21
Page 14 of 21
Page 15 of 21
Page 16 of 21
Page 17 of 21
Page 18 of 21
SEE ASME B31.3 PWHT TABLE 331.1.1 P-No 4 / 5 Code Exemptions do not apply
Page 20 of 21
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2001
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Attachment 3 - NACE SP-0472 Table 2:

Process/Filler Material Combinations Exempt from Weld Deposit Hardness Testing
ASME SEC II C (SFA 5.18) & ER70S-6 "Description" below.

A7. Description and Intended Use of Electrodes and Rods
A7.4 ER70S-6: Electrodes and rods of the ER70S-6 classification are intended for both single and multiple-pass
welding. They are especially suited for sheet metal applications, where smooth weld beads are desired,
and structural and plate steels that have moderate amounts of rust or mill scale.
A7.1 ER70S-2: Electrodes and rods of the ER70S-2 classification are primarily used for single-pass welding of killed,
semi-killed, and rimmed steels, but may be used for some multipass applications.
ER70S-2 Filler metals are used extensively to produce high quality, high toughness welds with the GTAW
process. These filler metals are also well suited for use in single side, melt through welding without a
protective root shielding gas on the backside of the joint. (GTAW, for sure = ER-70S-2)
A7.2 ER70S-3: Electrodes and rods of the ER70S-3 classification are intended for welding single-pass & multi-pass
welds. Typical base metal specifications are often the same as those for the ER70S-2 classification. Electrodes of
ER70S-3 classification are the most widely used of GMAW electrodes classified under this specification.
SAES-W-012, Section 6 (Welding Consumables)
Para. 6.1 Electrodes, filler wires, and fluxes shall conform to ASME SEC IIC. What does "conform" mean?
WELDING APPLICATIONS
Simply, ER70S-6 runs smooth (it's great for sheet metal per ASME/AWS), but clearly we don't have many
sheet metal pipelines in Saudi Aramco. So choose an application ER70S-2 (GTAW) or ER70S-3 (GMAW)
that conforms to ASME SEC II C. Don't allow hardness values to fall above minimum reqmts causing PWHT repair.
ASME SEC II C & NACE SP0472
SAES-W-11 : 14 Production Weld Hardness Testing
14.1 Testing shall be in accordance with NACE SP0472 and the requirements listed below. Exemptions with respect to welding process and
consumables are not allowed.
Page 21 of 21
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Review of Procedure for Weld Repair (Plant Piping)
SAIC-W-2002
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
MH's SPENT
PASS
FAIL
N/A
General Requirements Welding Process Control Procedure shall utilize SAIC-W-2013 along with this Checklist.
A1
Repairs are identified, controlled, tracked and reported per the database
requirements of S-PM-G000-1520-0006 (See Attachment 1):
A) ID is per unique numbering system (Para. 8.2)
S-PM-G000-1520B) Control is per the Contractor's Written & approved procedure & use of
0006, Section 8
Saudi Aramco Checklist SAIC-W-2013 & NDE SATIPs & Process Control
Checklists (Radiography, MT, PT, etc)
C) Tracking & reporting (Backlogs, etc) are per Para. 8.3
A2
Repair procedure shall include the following Provisions:

1) A step-by-step detail of the repair, from weld ID change thru the
excavation process, NDT, special cleaning & other considerations,
rewelding of the excavation, final acceptance/clearance (includes Final
NDE, PWHT, PMI, HT, visual acceptance, etc per S-PM-G000-15200006)
2) NDT* reqmts (MT/PT to verify defect removal & RT/UT)
3) Welding requirements (ie: WPS, Pre-heating, PWHT)
A4
Specific Repair requirements for cracks is stated as follows:

A) Cracked welds (except for crater cracks) are cut-out unless a
repair is approved by COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-1520B) Crack repairs require COMPANY special review & approval. Inspection
0011,
procedures are submitted to COMPANY prior to undertaking any repairs,
Para. 20.2
including excavation of the defect.
c) Crater cracks are ground out and NDT performed as necessary.
A5
Repair Procedure contains a disposition for weld repair as follows:

A) Welds may be repaired twice.
b) If the repair weld is still not acceptable after the second repair, then
COMPANY has the sole authority for the decision to permit additional
repair attempts or to require the entire weld be cut out.
Note: The limitation on the number of repairs does not include adjacent
sequential repairs where the length of the area to be repaired is limited
by structural strength or other considerations.
A6
All repaired welds shall be inspected using the original testing method.
S-PM-G000-1520Additional test methods may also be required, if deemed necessary by
0011,
the authorized COMPANY inspector. Replacement weld (cut-out) shall be
Para. 20.5,
examined as a repair.
A7
The repair procedure may utilize a welding procedure previously

S-PM-G000-1520approved by COMPANY in conjunction with a separate method statement
0011,
or it may be a separate detailed welding procedure.
Para. 20.4
A8
Damage or deformation to the base metal or welds, including dimensional

changes, caused by external forces (intentional or accidental), requires
S-PM-G000-1520special repair and inspection procedures to be submitted to ID, and if
0011,
necessary forwarded to COMPANY for review and approval, prior to
Para. 20.6
undertaking the repairs.
A9
Repair procedure states that repair welds are performed by welders

qualified in accordance with ASME SEC. IX. (Valid JCCs).
Page 1 of 7
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.1
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 10.1
TRAVEL TIME
S-PM-G000-15200006, Section 8
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para.20
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2002
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS:
NOTES:
1. USE SAIC-W-2013 & the applicable NDE SATIP for all repairs.
2. Utilize SAIC-M-2012 & Structural Steel & NDE SATIPs that define AWS D1.1 repair reqmts & NDE.
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 DATABASE, PROCESS CONTROL TRACKING (By Weld)
Attachment 2 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 REQUIREMENTS (REPAIRS)
1. S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping
2. ASME B31.3, Process Piping, Latest Edition
3. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code-Aluminum, 2004 Edition
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 7
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2002
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Page 3 of 7
Page 4 of 7
Page 5 of 7
Page 6 of 7
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2002
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
Attachment 2 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 REQUIREMENTS (REPAIRS)
Page 7 of 7
WELD-
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Review Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) Specification,
Procedure, & Table for On-Plot Piping
SAIC-W-2003
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements (Pre-Work)
A1
Contractor shall complete 100% Pressure Piping Design & submit a

Project Specific Design Specification for Welding containing:
A) Summary of Piping Line Classes & Design Information
B) Proposed Project PWHT Specification (details, notes, reqmts) that are
based on ASME Code & COMPANY Stds within workscope.
C) Proposed Project NDE Specification (Refer to the NDE SATIPs)
D) Proposed Project Specifications for other Special Processes such as
PMI, Pressure Testing, Coatings & Insulation
PWHT Specifications by Line Class are reviewed & approved by
COMPANY , this includes COMPANY Authorized Inspector . Follow
checklist & the applicable SATIPs.
Utilize Attachment 1 for review. PWHT Spec meets reqmts.
A2
PWHT Procedure shall include a step-by-step detail of the PWHT

specified, from initial weld ID & entry of PWHT into the S-PM-G000-15200006 Database through final visual acceptance, including reporting per SS-PM-G000-1520PM-G000-1520-0006 requirements. Activities shall be tied into the
0006, Section 8 &
Project welding Database. PWHT shall be properly sequenced relative to
Procedure
any NDT performed and Control over activities shall be documented.
See Attachment 2 . Production work, Reporting & Status (Backlogs,
etc) are controlled & documented.
A3
A written procedure describing the general PWHT requirements of

ASME B31.3, shall be submitted for review and approval of COMPANY
Note : review and approval process is the same as described for
welding procedures (Per Paragraph 9.1 of S-PM-G000-1520-0011 ).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.1
A4
PWHT procedure shall include descriptions of the equipment,

method of heating, location and type of heating elements, temperature
measurement method, and thermocouple locations
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.1
A5
Prior to start of WORK, Contractor shall prepare a Table listing (see A6 )

for each joint or component requiring heat treatment, & submit for
COMPANY review.
See Attachment 3 for a sample PWHT Table, SATR-W-2004.
S-PM-G000-1520A) This provides field direction for PWHT Field Crew / Personnel.
0011,
B) PWHT work / results are controlled & entered daily into the
Para. 15.2
COMPANY approved S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Production Weld
Database.
C)
Data specified in the PWHT Table shall meet ASME B31.3 PWHT Table
331.1.1 & Specific SA PWHT Requirements. Check accuracy.
A6
Table shall include the following info. for each joint or component:
a) location
b) drawing number
c) diameter
d) wall thickness
material
heating rate
cooling rate
soak temperature
soak time
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Page 1 of 15
S-PM-G000-,
1360-0001
Section 7
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.2
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
SYSTEM ID.
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2003
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
A7
Carbon & low alloy steel butt welds requiring PWHT for Process
Conditions & Services are as listed in Attachment 1.
A) PWHT requirement of Carbon steel for Caustic service shall be
decided by temperature and density and it shall be consult to the
COMPANY.
B) All monoethanolamine (MEA) solutions (all temperatures).
C) All diglycol amine (DGA) solutions above 138C design temp.
D) Rich amino diisoprop (ADIP) solutions above 90C design temp.
E) All lean ADIP solutions above 60C design temperature.
F) Boiler Deaerator serv (ambient temp vacuum deaerator = exempt)
G) Hydrogen service for P-No. 3, 4, and 5A/B/C base materials.
H) All diethanolamine (DEA) solutions.
These reqmts also apply to external welds to attach non-pressure
containing component to piping (e.g., reinforcement pad or sleeve
attached to the pipe) and to seal welds. Seal welds on threaded valves
may be exempt if PWHT will damage valve internals.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.3
A8
For applications where PWHT is required by service fluid (Item A7

above) " OR " where hardness limits are specified:
a) Reductions in PWHT temperature or alternative temperatures
below normal holding temps listed in ASME B31.3 are not permitted.
b) Minimum PWHT soak time shall be 1 hour.
c) If hardness limits are specified, production weld soak time shall not be
less than 80% of PQR soak time unless approved by COMPANY.
Note : A copy of the COMPANY approved WPS shall be cross checked
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.9
A10
The specified PWHT shall be applied over an area extending at least 3 x

thickness of the material being welded from each weld toe, but not less
than 25 mm from each weld toe, whichever is greater.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.4
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.5
A11
For PWHT not performed in a furnace, insulation shall be applied a

minimum of 300 mm on either side of the weld to be PWHT'd. Insulation
shall not be removed before temp. has cooled to < 300C.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.6
A12
Ends of open lines shall be closed off in order to eliminate drafts or

air circulation that could lower temperatures on inside surface of joints
unless the internal surface is also insulated.
A13
All temperatures within the heated zone for furnace or localized PWHT
shall exceed the specified minimum holding temperature.
A14
The actual temperature range for the soak period, as recorded by TC's,
shall not have a spread of more than 40C.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.6
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.10
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.10
A15
Welding or heating to joints already PWHT'd requires re-PWHT. PWHT

S-PM-G000-1520shall follow all welding and repairs, but shall precede any hydrotest. Note
0011,
Para. 15.11
: S-PM-G000-1520-0006 requires Weld ID change on repair.
A16
PWHT shall be carried out using one or more of the following types:
a) Permanent or semi-permanent furnaces (gas/oil/electric heaters)
b) Electrical resistance heaters.
c) Induction heaters.
A9
The PWHT heating and cooling rates > 316C shall not exceed 222C/hr
weld thickness in inches, but in no case > 222C/hr.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.12
Thermocouple Requirements
B1
If localized PWHT is used, the following minimum number of equally

spaced recording thermocouples (T/C) shall be used:
a) Pipe diameter of 305 mm or less: 1 T/C.
b) Pipe diameter above 305 mm up to and including 610 mm: 2 T/C.
c) Pipe diameter above 610 mm: 4 T/C.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.13
B2
Additional TCs are required if multiple heat control zones are used, in
which a control zone is not monitored by any of the primary T/Cs.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.13
Page 2 of 15
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
B3
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2003
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
S-PM-G000-1520Thermocouples and a calibrated temperature chart recorder shall be used

0011,
to provide an accurate and legible record of all PWHTs.
Para. 15.14
Page 3 of 15
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
B4
B5
B6
B7
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2003
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
S-PM-G000-1520All charts shall be marked with the date and sufficient information to
0011,
uniquely identify the joint/component being heat treated.
Para. 15.14
S-PM-G000-1520Multipoint chart recorders clearly differentiate/identify each channel /point
0011,
by use of different colored inks or automatic # stamping.
Para. 15.14
S-PM-G000-1520Temperature recorders shall be calibrated every three months & a current
0011,
calibration sticker shall be maintained on the recorder.
Para. 15.15
S-PM-G000-1520Calibration frequency may be extended to 6* months with PID approval
0011,
if documented calibration checks for recorder demonstrate acceptable
Para. 15.15 &
accuracy for a suitable period. *Sch Q M&TE limit.
Sch Q, M&TE
B8
Only Type K (Chromel-Alumel) or Type J (iron-Constantan) TCs are

permitted. All extension, compensating, and jumper cables in the
measurement or control circuits shall be the specified TC wire or
matching extension wire, i.e., KX or JX, as appropriate.
B9
For Type K TCs, copper- Constantan (Type T) compensating cables may

be used with the following conditions:
a) Junction between the copper-Constantan compensating cable
S-PM-G000-15200011,
and the Type K thermocouple lead shall be a minimum of 0.5 m*
Para. 15.16.1
outside the insulated area. (*Inspection to verify each weld)
b) Acceptable temperature range of the junction between the
compensating cable & thermocouple lead is from 0 to +80C.
B10
The national standard that the thermocouple conforms to shall be

indicated in the PWHT procedure.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.16.2
B11
Procedure shall also include a listing of the insulation coloring of each

core wire & the overall sheath for both the compensating cable & TC.
Site inspectors to verify that the proper wires have been used and
are connected in the proper polarity.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.16.2
B12
Thermocouples shall be attached to the component by capacitive

discharge welding only.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.16.3
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.16.1
Preparation for PWHT
C1
Thermocouples shall not be in direct contact with electrical heating

elements or subjected to flame impingement by gas or oil burners.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.16.3
C2
Prior to the start of the PWHT, components shall be checked to ensure

that all restraints are removed and the component is free to expand and
contract, and suitable and sufficient supports are used.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.17
C3
In addition, the PWHT chart should be marked, prior to PWHT, with

identification number of the weld(s).
C4
All machined surfaces, such as flange faces, threaded bolt holes,

threads, etc., shall be protected from oxidation during the heat treatment
by coating with deoxaluminite or other suitable material.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.17
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.18
C5
All PWHT chart records shall be submitted to COMPANY for review and
approval. All records shall be submitted as part of the equipment file for
permanent record.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.19
C6
After completion of the PWHT all thermocouples shall be removed and

the attachment areas ground smooth to clean and sound metal. If
specified by PID, the areas shall be MT'd or PT'd after grinding.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.20
Page 4 of 15
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
REMARKS:
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2003
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Page 5 of 15
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

PROJECT TITLE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2003
CONTRACT NUMBER
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
ITEM
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
No.
NOTES: 1. Code exemptions for PWHT for P-No. 4 & P-No. 5 materials are not allowed at COMPANY. PWHT all P-No. 4 & P-No. 5 mat'l
welds & pressure boundary attachments when Sour Service exists or nominal chrome content is above 1.5%. (S-PM-G000-1520-0011,
Para. 15.8)
2. Condition of PWHT Insulation blankets shall be monitored for deterioration & burn damage. Deteriorated blankets and those without wire
mesh coverings release Ceramic fibers into the immediate work area and are a great health hazard (Safety & Quality Concern).
3. Strict controls for work sequence and work segregation are required.
4. For Recording of Results & Final Acceptance, utilize checklist SAIC-W-2004 R3 to cover any points in the Procedure deemed necessary.
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - Requirements for Heat Treatment (ASME B31.3, Table 331.1.1) & S-PM-G000-1520-0011
Attachment 3 - SATR-W-2004 - SAMPLE PWHT TABLE (PROCESS CONTROL TRACKING BY WELD)
1. S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping,
2. ASME B31.3, Process Piping (Latest Edition)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 6 of 15
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

WELDSAIC-W-2003
11-Dec-13
Attachment 1 - Requirements for Heat Treatment (ASME B31.3, Table 331.1.1) & S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Section
15
Page 7 of 15
Page 8 of 15
Page 9 of 15
Page 10 of 15
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2003
11-Dec-13
WELDProcedure, & Table for On-Plot Piping
Page 11 of 15
Page 12 of 15
Page 13 of 15
Page 14 of 15
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2003
11-Dec-13
WELDProcedure, & Table for On-Plot Piping
Instructions for PWHT Table (Line List) Use: 1. Perform Heat Treatment in conjunction with SAIC-W-2012 and
SAIC-W-2014 for Brinnell Hardness Testing and the applicable NDE SATIP & Project NDE Specification.
2. Localized PWHT = 100% Brinnell Hardness Testing. Furnace Batch PWHT = 10% Brinnell Hardness Testing.
3. PWHT Crew & QC Responsible utilize this Work Sheet to perform field work under close supervison/Witness.
4. Results are entered into the S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database for Welds on Projects. Verify Weld ID numbers
carefully.
5. Such Databases are not needed when 500 welds or less are in the Project Work Scope (S-PM-G000-1520-0006
Reqmt).
6. PWHT shall be performed per approved Project Welding & PWHT Specification including all notes.
7. Those responsible for work and data entry have been approved by Saudi Aramco to perform work on IK Projects.
8. Rework shall require a new Weld ID Number (suffix added = R 1, etc) per SAEp-1160 Requirements.
Page 15 of 15
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) for On-Plot Piping
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2004
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements (Pre-Work)
A1
Company has approved the Project Specification for Welding and the
PWHT Specification (all details, notes, reqmts) that are based on ASME
Code & Saudi Aramco Stds within workscope.
PWHT Specifications by Line Class are reviewed & approved by
COMPANY , this includes Authorized COMPANY Inspector. Follow
checklist & the applicable SATIPs. Requirements are clear.
See Attachment 1 for PWHT requirements & general note 1.
A2
PWHT Procedure has been approved & includes a step-by-step detail of

the PWHT specified, from initial weld ID & entry of PWHT into the S-PMG000-1520-0006 Database through final visual acceptance, including
S-PM-G000-1520reporting per S-PM-G000-1520-0006 requirements. Activities shall be tied
0006, Section 8 &
into the Project welding Database. PWHT is properly sequenced relative
Procedure
to NDT performed and Control over activities is documented.
Production work, Reporting & Status (Backlogs, etc) shall be
carefully controlled & documented. See Attachment 2.
A3
A written procedure describing the general PWHT requirements of ASME

B31.3, has been reviewed and approved by COMPANY and the
application has been verified and accepted by COMPANY Assigned
Inspector. Approval Process is the same for welding Procedures &
PWHT procedure shall include descriptions of the:
S-PM-G000-1520a) equipment
0011,
b) method of heating
Para. 15.1
c) location and type of heating elements
d) temperature measurement
e) thermocouple locations
Perform initial Set-up Inspection to verify that the set-up is performed per
Procedure (safety check) for elements above
A4
Prior to start of WORK, Contractor shall prepare a Table listing points at

(A5) for each joint or component requiring heat treatment , & submit for
PID review.
Note :See Attachment 3 for a sample PWHT Table,SATR-W2004. a. This S-PM-G000-15200011,
provides field direction for PWHT Field Crew / Personnel.
Para. 15.2
b) PWHT work / results are controlled & entered daily into the COMPANY
approved S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Production Weld Database.
c) Data specified in the PWHT Table shall meet ASME B31.3 PWHT
Table 331.1.1 & Specific SA PWHT Requirements. Check accuracy.
A5
Table shall include the following info. for each joint or component:
a) location
b) drawing number
c) diameter
d) wall thickness
e) material
f) heating rate
g) cooling rate
h) soak temperature
i) soak time
Verify that code and COMPANY requirements have been met.
Page 1 of 15
S-PM-G000-13600001,
Section 7
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.2
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2004
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
A6
Carbon & low alloy steel butt welds requiring PWHT for Process
Conditions & Services are as listed in Attachment 1.
A) PWHT requirement of Carbon steel for Caustic service shall be
decided by temperature and density and it shall be consult to the
COMPANY.
B) All monoethanolamine (MEA) solutions (all temperatures).
C) All diglycol amine (DGA) solutions above 138C design temp.
D) Rich amino diisoprop (ADIP) solutions above 90C design temp.
E) All lean ADIP solutions above 60C design temperature.
F) Boiler Deaerator serv (ambient temp vacuum deaerator = exempt)
G) Hydrogen service for P-No. 3, 4, and 5A/B/C base materials.
H) All diethanolamine (DEA) solutions.
These reqmts also apply to external welds to attach non-pressure
containing component to piping (e.g., reinforcement pad or sleeve
attached to the pipe) and to seal welds. Seal welds on threaded valves
may be exempt if PWHT will damage valve internals.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.3
A7
For applications where PWHT is required by service fluid (Item A6

above) " OR " where hardness limits are specified:
a) Reductions in PWHT temperature or alternative temperatures
below normal holding temps listed in ASME B31.3 are not permitted.
b) Minimum PWHT soak time shall be 1 hour.
c) If hardness limits are specified, production weld soak time shall not be
less than 80% of PQR soak time unless approved by COMPANY.
A copy of the COMPANY approved WPS shall be cross checked
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.9
A8
The PWHT heating and cooling rates > 316C shall not exceed 222C/hr
weld thickness in inches, but in no case > 222C/hr.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.4
A9
The specified PWHT shall be applied over an area extending at least 3 x

thickness of the material being welded from each weld toe, but not less
than 25 mm from each weld toe, whichever is greater.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.5
A10
For PWHT not performed in a furnace, insulation shall be applied a

minimum of 300 mm on either side of the weld to be PWHT'd. Insulation
shall not be removed before temp. has cooled to < 300C.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.6
A11
Ends of open lines shall be closed off in order to eliminate drafts or

air circulation that could lower temperatures on inside surface of joints
unless the internal surface is also insulated.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.6
A12
All temperatures within the heated zone for furnace or localized PWHT
shall exceed the specified minimum holding temperature.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.10
A13
The actual temperature range for the soak period, as recorded by TC's,
shall not have a spread of more than 40C.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.10
A14
Welding or heating to joints already PWHT'd requires re-PWHT. PWHT

S-PM-G000-1520shall follow all welding and repairs, but shall precede any hydrotest.
S0011,
Para. 15.11
PM-G000-1520-0006 requires Weld ID change on repair.
A15
PWHT shall be carried out using one or more of the following types:
a) Permanent or semi-permanent furnaces (gas/oil/electric heaters)
b) Electrical resistance heaters.
c) Induction heaters.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.12
Thermocouple Requirements
B1
If localized PWHT is used, the following minimum number of equally

spaced recording thermocouples (T/C) shall be used:
a) Pipe diameter of 305 mm or less: 1 T/C.
b) Pipe diameter above 305 mm up to and including 610 mm: 2 T/C.
c) Pipe diameter above 610 mm: 4 T/C.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.13
B2
Additional TCs are required if multiple heat control zones are used, in
which a control zone is not monitored by any of the primary T/Cs.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.13
Page 2 of 15
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2004
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B3
Thermocouples and a calibrated temperature chart recorder shall be used

to provide an accurate and legible record of all PWHTs.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.14
B4
All charts shall be marked with the date and sufficient information to
uniquely identify the joint/component being heat treated.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.14
Page 3 of 15
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2004
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B5
Multipoint chart recorders clearly differentiate/identify each channel /point

by use of different colored inks or automatic # stamping.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.14
B6
Temperature recorders shall be calibrated every three months & a current

calibration sticker shall be maintained on the recorder.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.15
B7
Calibration frequency may be extended to 12* months with COMPANY

approval if documented calibration checks for recorder demonstrate
acceptable accuracy for a suitable period. *Sch Q M&TE limit.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.15 &
Sch Q, M&TE
B8
Only Type K (Chromel-Alumel) or Type J (iron-Constantan) TCs are

permitted. All extension, compensating, and jumper cables in the
measurement or control circuits shall be the specified TC wire or
matching extension wire, i.e., KX or JX, as appropriate.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.16.1
B9
For Type K TCs, copper- Constantan (Type T) compensating cables may

be used with the following conditions:
a) Junction between the copper-Constantan compensating cable
S-PM-G000-15200011,
and the Type K thermocouple lead shall be a minimum of 0.5 m*
Para. 13.16.1
outside the insulated area. (*Inspection to verify each weld)
b) Acceptable temperature range of the junction between the
compensating cable & thermocouple lead is from 0 to +80C.
B10
The national standard that the thermocouple conforms to shall be

indicated in the PWHT procedure.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.16.2
B11
Procedure shall also include a listing of the insulation coloring of each

core wire & the overall sheath for both the compensating cable & TC.
Site inspectors to verify that the proper wires have been used and
are connected in the proper polarity.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.16.2
B12
Thermocouples shall be attached to the component by capacitive

discharge welding only.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.16.3
Preparation & Execution of PWHT:
C1
Thermocouples shall not be in direct contact with electrical heating

elements or subjected to flame impingement by gas or oil burners.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.16.3
C2
Prior to the start of the PWHT, components shall be checked to ensure

that all restraints are removed and the component is free to expand and
contract, and suitable and sufficient supports are used.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.17
C3
In addition, the PWHT chart should be marked, prior to PWHT, with

identification number of the weld(s). Matches Database Weld ID
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.17
C4
All machined surfaces, such as flange faces, threaded bolt holes,

threads, etc., shall be protected from oxidation during PWHT by
coating with deoxaluminite or other suitable material.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.18
C5
All PWHT chart records shall be submitted to Saudi Aramco Inspection

for review and approval. All records shall be submitted as part of the
equipment file for permanent record.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.19
Post Work Examination & Recording of Results:
D1
After completion of the PWHT all thermocouples shall be removed and

the attachment areas ground smooth to clean and sound metal. If/when
specified by COMPANY, areas shall be MT'd or PT'd after grinding.
Determine if MT or PT is required based on visual exam.
Visual exam shall cover entire surface of heated areas and shall verify
that no heat damage exists. Check all machined surfaces, threaded bolt
holes, threads, etc. for heat damage and oxidation See Notes.
Page 4 of 15
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.20
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2004
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
D2
Utilize SAIC-W-2012 (Procedure) & SAIC-W-2014 (Inspection) &

perform 100% Brinnell Hardness Testing on all PWHT'd welds where the
localized PWHT method was employed. For smaller sections, 10% BHT
is allowed for Furnace Batch method.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 16
Page 5 of 15
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
SAIC NUMBER

DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2004
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
D3
All PWHT chart records shall be reviewed and submitted to Saudi

Aramco Inspection for review and approval. All records shall be submitted S-PM-G000-1520as part of the equipment file for permanent record.
0011,
Complete Reports. SATR-W-2004 & SATR-W-2005. Enter results in
Para. 15.19
Weld Database.
D4
Welding or heating to joints that have been PWHTed, shall require

re-PWHT. PWHT shall follow all welding and repairs, but shall be
performed prior to any hydrotest.
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 15.11
REMARKS:
NOTES: 1. Code exemptions for PWHT for P-No. 4 & P-No. 5 materials are not allowed at COMPANY. PWHT all P-No. 4 & P-No. 5 mat'l
welds & pressure boundary attachments when Sour Service exists or nominal chrome content is above 1.5%. (S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Para. 13.8)
2. Condition of PWHT Insulation blankets shall be monitored for deterioration & burn damage. Deteriorated blankets and those without wire
mesh coverings release Ceramic fibers into the immediate work area and are a serious health hazard (Safety & Quality Concern).
3. Heat damage & oxidation shall not be visible after PWHT operations.
ATTACHMENTS:
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: 1. S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping
2. ASME B31.3, Process Piping (Latest Edition)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 6 of 15
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2004
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1 - Requirements for Heat Treatment (ASME B31.3, Table 331.1.1) & S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Section
15
Page 7 of 15
Page 8 of 15
Page 9 of 15
Page 10 of 15
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2004
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Page 12 of 15
Page 13 of 15
Page 14 of 15
Page 15 of 15
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Pre-Welding Inspection (Shop & Field) of Plant Piping
SAIC-W-2005
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements (Pre-Welding)
A1
Approved Welding Procedure(s) or WPS are available/posted at the weld

site.
S-PM-G000-1520Note: All attachments (A, B) and cover pages to WPS are posted. Page
0011,
A1 (WPS Approval Request) is signed by Company welding
Para. 9.1.8
Representative .WPS & Special Process Control Procedures are
approved.
A2
Welder(s) have been issued Job Clearance Card, and that range of
qualification shown matches the application of WPS being used.
A4
SAEP-324,
Sec. 5
SAES-L-310,
Inspectors highlight any special features or precautions listed in the spec
Section 7,
concerning Welding & other special processes such as NDE criteria (Line Last Bullet Item
Class, Service Category or SA reqmts.)
(Welding Specs)
& Special
*Best Practice: Tool-Box Meeting or Pre-Job Conference covers
Process Control
approved Welding Specs & any special requirements
(Pre-Welding)
All weld joints shall be marked for identification as follows:S-PM-G000S-PM-G000-15201520-0006 & SAIC-W-2008.
0006 Section 8 &
a) by weld number and by welder symbol.
S-PM-G000-1520b) with suitable weather-proof marking material.
0011,
c) easy visibility location, and durable for a time suitable to authorized
Section 18
COMPANY inspector.
A5
Weld number & Welder symbol are to be marked adjacent to welds.

Note: Use suitable weather-proof permanent markers & materials, such
as certified low-chloride (50ppm) markers for Stainless steel
Note: This is an assigned unique weld ID number to be tracked by
database & shall remain intact during the construction process
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 18.1
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.1
A6
Isometric Piping Dwgs for work have been reviewed & approved:
A) Process Control Procedure for Welding is followed relative to checks
on mat'ls (Traceability, marking, dimensional) using latest approved*
drawing revisions. *Document Control system exists.
B) Fab Shops have been approved per SAIC-L-2031. Shops follow
strict mat'l & consumable controls as outlined in Procedure
C) Equipment checks for welders (checks are established)
SAIC-L-2031 was utilized prior to Kickoff of Construction .
SAES-L-310,
Section 7,
Bullet Item
& Special
Process Control
(Pre-Welding)
A7
Welding power supplies are calibrated

Note: Sch Q requires a 6 month interval (max). Process control
procedures shall detail intervals.
7570 is used for validation when Charpy Impacts are specified.
Note : See SAIC-W-2011 checklist.
BS
Page 1 of 29
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section 21 &
Sch Q, Attch-IV
Para-6
WELD-
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
A3
11-Dec-13
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
PASS
FAIL
WELD JOINT EDGE PREP (Includes Cutting & Arc Gouging Method, Joint Edge Buttering, & Cleaning Method)
B1
Stainless steel and nonferrous materials shall be cleaned with grinding

S-PM-G000-1520wheels or stainless steel brushes not previously used on other materials..
0011, Para.
13.3.3
Use Attachment 1 . Lessons Learned (CuNi - SS segregation)
B2
Thermal cut surfaces of stainless steel and non-ferrous materials shall be

ground to bright (unoxidized) material prior to welding.
B3
A minimum of 1.5 mm depth shall be removed by grinding/machining from

S-PM-G000-1520thermally cut or gouged surfaces of air-hardenable materials (e.g.,
0011,
Chrome-Moly steels or P-No 3 / 4 / 5). Additional NDE required on cut
Para. 11.2.2.3
surfaces is at the option of the authorized COMPANY inspector.
B4
Ragged and irregular edges shall be ground or machined to bright metal.

Thermally cut or gouged surfaces for all materials, including carbon
steels, shall be power brushed or ground prior to welding.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para 13.2.2.1 &
Para 13.2.2.2
B5
All holes cut for set-on nozzles, bosses, or branch connections shall be
ground smooth and the diameter of the hole shall be 1.6 mm of the
inside diameter of the set-on member.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.2.1
B6
Re-cut or re-beveled Fittings shall have cut surfaces examined for

laminations before welding. Perform MT or PT.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.3
B7
Oil, moisture, scale, rust, paint (except approved weldable primers),

metallic coatings (e.g. zinc) or other foreign matter, has been removed
from weld surfaces at least 25mm adjacent to weld joint.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.1
B8
Butt joint Internal misalignment shall not exceed 1.5 mm.

NOTE: Internal tapering (ASME B31.3) by machining, backwelding, or a
combination may be used to correct any misalignment.
If external surfaces of the components are not aligned, the weld shall be
tapered between them. [ASME B31.3, Para. 328.4.3 (2).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.3
B9
Buttering or weld build-up on the prepared surfaces shall not exceed the
lesser of of the base metal thickness or 10mm without the approval of
S-PM-G000-1520COMPANY. If the buttering or buildup exceeds this, then the following
0011,
Para.
requirements shall apply.
a) The buttering
13.2.5
&
operation shall be witnessed by COMPANY.
b) The buttering shall
SATIP-W-011-01
be inspected by RT, and PT or MT after completion of the build-up but
Item 3.5
before final welding of the joint. Note.repairs shall be performed per SAICW-2033
B10
Note: Inspect Piping ends for Cleanliness int/ext FBE Coating:

A) Solvent Clean oil residues.
B) Chloride Content Testing (ID & OD) for External & Internal FBE
C) Feathering of Internal FBE Coating & Surface Preparation
Applicable SATIP
FBE COATING
B11
Coated & clad or overlayed surfaces are protected from welding arc,
associated weld spatter, and damage from ground clamps or other
associated equipment. Take appropriate action for protection to provide
cover & ensure proper selection of grounding locations is inspected.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.11
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.2.2.4
WELD JOINT DETAIL
C1
All pressure-containing welds shall be made with multiple passes.

Socket welds shall be welded in two passes S-PM-G000-1520-0011
Para 11.1 (SAIC-W-2037)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.1 & Para
13.18.1
C2
All nozzles, branch, and tee connections shall be made with full
penetration groove welds only.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.2
Page 2 of 29
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C3
Internal misalignment of butt joints shall not exceed 1.5 mm. Internal
tapering in accordance with ASME B31.3 (Par 328.4.3 ) by machining,
backwelding, or a combination may be used to correct the misalignment.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.3
C4
Permanent backing rings or strips shall not be used unless approved by

the COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.4
C5
Full penetration groove joint included angles < 30 degrees, except

portions of compound bevels, shall not be used without approval.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.7
C6
For nozzles with re-pads, the nozzle attachment weld shall be

completed & inspected (SAIC-L-2010 PMI & See Para 19.5 ) prior to
installing the re-pad.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.7
C7
Every Weld joint conforms with an approved WPS (Joint Detail):

a. Base material & b. Thickness & c. Bevel type & d. Root Gap
e) Special surface preparation instructions (Low-Alloys, etc)
Adequate field instruction (detail or written notes) exist.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.1.1
C8
Minimum distance between parallel butt welds shall be 20 mm or

three times the wall thickness of the joint, whichever is greater.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.15.2
C9
Pressure containing welds (e.g., nozzles and other attachments) shall be

separated from other pressure containing welds by no less than 20 mm or
three times the joint thickness, whichever is greater.
S-PM-G000-1520NOTE: RT of the butt welds is required when minimum separation is not
0011,
Para. 11.15.2
achieved. Inspection approval is required For joints other than butt welds,
other appropriate inspection methods shall be used, depending on the
geometry and material.
Welding Environment (Planning & Weather Checks)
D1
Wind shields or tents shall be required when wind is strong enough to

affect arc stability or shielding gas coverage or when deemed necessary
by COMPANY. GTAW, GMAW, or gas-shielded FCAW shall not be used S-PM-G000-1520for field or yard fabrication unless adequate windshield is used. Wind
0011,
velocity in the weld area for GTAW, GMAW, or gas shielded FCAW shall
Section 13.1.1
not exceed 8 kph (2.2 m/s)
keep other side pipe ends closed when working with any weld process.
D2
Welding is not done if surfaces are wet, damp, exposed to rain, or when
welders are exposed to inclement conditions such as wind blown sand,
dust, rain.
D3
For field welding, remote Current controls shall be used if welding is more
S-PM-G000-1520than 30 m from welding power source or when welders are working in
0011, Para. 21.1
"remote" locations (e.g., on an elevated piperack).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.1.2
Welding Consumables Use also SAIC-W-2032
E1
Check WPS application & consumable Filler metal size, type & class
conform with the WPS.
Note.Change
S-PM-G000-1520in filler metal or deposit chemistry from A-No. 1 (based on ASME SEC IX)
0011,
to A-No. 2 and vice-versa is not permitted without approval obtained
Para. 9.4.5
through welding procedure review process. Change from A-No. 1 to ANo. 2 is not permitted for sour service without requalification.
E2
Filler Metal and other weld consumables at weld site are controlled as per
SAIC-W-2032 (4 & 8 hr rules, reconditioned rod use, etc).
Welders have issue slips at site. Check these to SATR-W-2010.
Page 3 of 29
As Referenced
SAIC-W-2032
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
E3
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Welding consumables shall be the same brand, type, maximum size as

indicated on WPS & PQR for welding processes as follows:
A) GMAW electrode specified on WPS with impact toughness reqmt
B) SAW flux specified
C) FCAW electrode specified
Workmanship, Technique & Preheating (Pre-Job Awareness)
Page 4 of 29
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.4.4
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2005
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
F1
Welders & Fitters know the requirements for Preheating & Tack Welding
before the first tack weld is made.
See
Attachment 2.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section 13 & 14
F2
GTAW Practices (Consumable Control, Technique, Purging) are

acceptable and in place before work & follow Attachment 3.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section 13
Preheat
G1
If a weld joint is wet or has surface moisture or condensation, it shall be

S-PM-G000-1520dried by heating for a distance of 100 mm from the weld joint and shall be
0011,
warm to the hand before welding unless a greater preheat temperature is
Para. 14.3
required.
G2
Preheat temperature selected/used is sufficient to prevent cracking &

achieve req'd hardness value OR at least the greater as follows:
A) 10C (50 F).
B) Required/recommended preheat listed in ASME B31.3 Tables.
C) Pre-heat temps from SASD AE-036451 (8 pgs) for ASME P-No. 1
materials, including API grades up to and including X60.
D) Preheat value listed in Tables 3A and 3B for SMAW process.
E) Temperature determined by COMPANY for steels with SMYS above
60 ksi, (incl API grades X65 or greater) or for matl without ASME P-No.
F) Temperature as specified in the approved welding procedure.
Note: Preheat is clearly specified in the WPS or Process Control
Procedure to give clear & available field instruction for WORK
Flanges, fittings and piping often require different preheat temps due to
differing Carbon Equivalent Values. Know these reqmts.
G3
Preheat temperatures shall be established over a minimum distance of 75 S-PM-G000-15200011,

mm on each side of the weld. Preheat temperature specified (WPS, etc)
Para. 14.5
is obtained prior to & maintained during welding.
G4
Temperature-indicating crayons, thermocouples, or contact pyrometers

shall be used to measure preheat & interpass temps.
Temperature indicating crayons are prohibited for any weld joint to be
coated, or that will have a heat-shrink sleeve installed on it.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 14.4
G5
On wall thickness exceeding 25mm, preheat is done from the same side
as the welding. Heat source is removed for 1 minute prior to measuring
the temperature. (allow temperature equalization).
Perform frequent checks to maintain preheat temps during welding
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 14.6
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 14.1
REMARKS:
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (PFI-ES-43, From SAIC-L-2031, Section F)
Attachment 2 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 TECHNIQUE, WORKMANSHIP & PREHEATING
Attachment 3 - GTAW PRACTICES (CONSUMABLE CONTROL, TECHNIQUE, PURGING)
Attachment 4 - HEAT INPUT MEASUREMENT REQUIREMENTS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: 1. S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping.
2.
SAES-W-016, Welding of Special Corrosion-Resistant Materials, (30 March 2005)
3.
12-SAMSS-007, Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel (3 September 2006)
4.
SAEP-324, Certification Review and Registration of Project Welders and Brazers, 1 July 2008
5.
SAES-W-011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping, (30 March 2005)
Saudi Aramco

T&I Witnessed
Page 5 of 29
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-W-2005
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
COMPANY Inspector
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 6 of 29
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-

F
Austenitic Stainless Steel & Nickel Alloy Shop (Per SAIC-L-2031)

Cross-Contamination Measures (Shop & Field)
Check APPLY 100% IN WELD SHOPS,

any Fail FIELD APPLICATION IS AS SHOWN
Stainless Steel & Nickel Alloy Shops are safely & properly ventillated (ANSI Z49.1).
Adequate air movers lift toxic fumes. Check for Confined spaces in the field*.
Handle Austenitic stainless steel & nickel alloys with nylon slings or equipment protected
with a non-contaminating buffer mat'l.
Conduct a visual exam of both internal & external surfaces to detect existing
contamination or gouges caused by contact with contaminating material.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 1
*Check in field
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.1
Check in field
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.2
Check in field
F5
Fittings are stored on pallets or shelving constructed of non-contaminating material
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.3
N/A field
F6
Storage areas for these matls are separate from areas where CS material is stored.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.4
N/A field
F7
SS material stored outdoors was covered (water repellent sheet, etc).
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.5
Check in field
F8
CS strapping is used if a durable, non-contaminating mat'l (clean wood, cardboard, cloth,

paper & SS buffer) isolates the strapping from contact with the stainless steel or nickel
alloy. Gray duct tape (high chlorides) is absolutely prohibited
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.6
Check in field
F9
Walking on austenitic SS or nickel alloy material is not allowed.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.7
Check in field
F10
Contact surfaces of tools & equipment* containing CS, zinc, copper or their alloys are
covered in noncontaminating matl. (Shall be adequate to prevent cross-contamination)
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.1
Check in field
*scaffold, etc
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.2
Check in field
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.3
Check in field
F2
F3
F4
F11
F12
Tools (grinding wheel, wire brush, etc) are color coded and used ONLY for each
specific metal. Hawiyeh Lessons Learned (copper contamination / SS)
Grinding discs, abrasive discs & belts are "labelled for SS" and made of resin-bonded
alumina, silicon carbide or zirconium carbide. (No Sulphurized items)
F13
Only 300 series SS brushes are used on austenitic & nickel alloys.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.4
Check in field
F14
All material removal & cleaning tools are marked to identify that they are to be used on
specific austenitic & nickel alloy materials only. Marking is visible while a tool is in use.
(Purple & other color codes). Different grades of alloys use new/ different tools.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.5
Check in field
F15
Austenitic & nickel alloy material fabrication areas are separated from CS areas (upwind to
prevent cross contamination).
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.6
Field avoids
contamination
F16
Suitable methods prevent cross contamination by CS shavings, grinding dust, and zinc dust
from coating operations by Enclosure, separation & location of work areas OR Engineering
controls & ventillation assure cleanliness & safety
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.6
Check in field
Field shielding
as suitable
F17
Where tape is used for back purging, the tape uses an adhesive with a water soluble
chloride content not exceeding 50 ppm. Gray duct tape is prohibited (chlorides)
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.7
Check in field
F18
Pressure-sensitive & adhesive-backed tape is removed (along with any adhesive residue)
using a suitable solvent or abrasive.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.8
Check in field
F19
Cutting fluids or oils are low halogen, low sulphur & are completely removed from all
surfaces prior to any welding or forming.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.9
Check in field
F20
Shipping of materials uses new packing matls & shipping protectors such as PVC caps,
plugs, & new adhesive tapes. No harmful substances are used in shipping.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.1
Check in field
staging areas
F21
Certified chloride-free marking or color coding has a water soluble chloride content
below 50 ppm (measured after drying). Weld ID is marked per SAIC-W-2008
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.2
Check in field
F22
ID tags & Attachment devices used are made of noncontaminating materials.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.3
Check in field
F23
Austenitic stainless steel & nickel alloys are handled in a manner that will minimize the risk
of material becoming contaminated. Small segments use caution (controls)
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.4
Check in field
F24
Alloys on same load as CS matl are segregated by wood bracing or other suited matl.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.4
Check in field
NOTES: 1) Prevent costly cross contamination repairs* (*Cleaning/passivation per ASTM A380 methods shall be COMPANY approved). 2)
Where cross contamination occurs, do not allow welding. If rust is not yet visible, Water-wet with pure Demin/distilled water to form rust using clean
soaked rag on suspect areas. Wet-dry cycles allows test areas to remain dry for a total of 8 hrs in a 24-hr test period. (Pass) shows no evidence of
rust stains or corrosion product. Fact: Once cross-contamination occurs, rust will remain until repaired. 3) Copper Contamination in SS (From
CuNi electrodes, grinders, etc) exists when PMI Cu values exceed 0.7% - See Hawiyah LL).
Page 7 of 29
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (Photo Examples for Inspector Awareness)
F-11 & F12 Color Coding of cutter & grinders (yellow tape = 316L mat'l only) & discs used for SS works
F-10 Examples of Approved Shop with acceptable "buffer material" to prevent Cross contamination
Page 8 of 29
Page 9 of 29
Tungsten Sharpeners are required to prevent Tungsten Tip Contamination (Piranha Model shown)
Creative yet simple Jigs & Restraints with buffer mat'l prevent welding distortion and cross contamination
Page 10 of 29
Item F-10 Inspector Caution: Prevent Copper Contamination of Stainless Steel at grounding points Ground
Clamps must be similar metallurgy or as shown here, quality 316L SS overlay welds were made.
Page 11 of 29
Adjustable Non-metallic pipe roller supports designed specifically for Stainless Steel
Typical GTAW (Tig) rig with portable pallet making a weld. Note the taped ends using an approved tape low in
chlorides (Never allow gray duct tape in SS Shop). Lastly, 316L electrodes without color code ends
Page 12 of 29
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (Photo Example of Approved SS Shop)
Page 13 of 29
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (Photo Examples of CS Contamination of SS piping)

Note 1: Passivation Cleaning per ASTM A380 is now required (or COMPANY approved other method)
Note 2: Examples are from Vendor supplied skid-mounted Pumps (Associated piping)
Page 14 of 29
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (Hawiyeh Lessons Learned CuNi - SS Contamination)

Lessons Learned Summary: Always make sure everything in a SS & Non-Ferrous Material Shop & in the field is
field is color coded / segregated, especially CuNi electrodes (coat them green on the ends). Take steps
early to completely segregate and color code all materials, electrodes, and especially Tools such as
cutting wheels, grinders, brushes FOR EACH SPECIFIC MATERIAL USED ON THE JOB. Note the unusual
discoloration of the Copper Contaminated 316L SS welds in the COMPANY photos below. In the final analysis,
PMI results showing Copper Content greater than 0.7% indicate unacceptable "cross contamination".
Page 15 of 29
Page 16 of 29
Photo below shows both ERCuNi & ER316L Electrodes - Highlighting need for color coding electrode ends
Page 17 of 29
Summary Notes: Following #6 Recommedation, Simulation Samples (info only) were taken at Khurais. Samples
showed PMI results for 316L SS greater than 0.7% Copper indicated a Copper Contamination. As Certain fittings
have up to 0.7% Copper content, this is above the 0.4% noted in the COMPANY report. CuNi tacks in a 316L joint
are very easily picked up by PMI due to dilution. Also, the use of a grinder previously used on CuNi, then
afterwards used on 316L SS showed a PMI test failure. Prevent cracking and failures!
Page 18 of 29
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
ATTACHMENT 2 - SAES-W-011 TECHNIQUE, WORKMANSHIP & PREHEATING
Page 19 of 29
Page 20 of 29
Page 21 of 29
Page 22 of 29
Page 23 of 29
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
ATT. 3 - GTAW PRACTICES (CONSUMABLE CONTROL, TECHNIQUE, PURGING)

GTAW CONSUMABLES (CONTROL & SURVEILLANCE)
repair/replace the electrode by means listed below in Tungsten Repair section. If weld is to be of RT quality then the tungsten inclusion shall
be ground out (repair). Power source & current used shall be specified on the WPS & shall be that used in the field.
Tungsten electrode & Consumable Preparation & Redressing/Repair: Tungsten electrode preparation (before welding) and repair
or redressing of contaminated and/or oxidized tips is an area frequently overlooked by organizations unfamiliar with proper shop practices.
Contaminated electrodes produce an erratic arc & dirty, contaminated welds of inconsistent quality. Cutting and grinding contaminated and
or oxidized tungsten electrode tips using the common unacceptable practice of silicon carbide grinding wheels spreads contamination and
does not produce quality GTAW welds because of a tendency for tip fracturing & splintering & thus the need for frequent redressing. Use
of silicon carbide type* grinding wheels results in contamination of tungsten & inconsistent tip quality. *Prohibited per COMPANY.
Quality Step (COMPANY approved, Required for shop approval): Procedures & surveillance shall ensure proper shop & field practices:
1. Properly prepare new tungsten electrodes by using diamond type cutting equipment specifically designed for Tungsten (Piranha, etc)
These commercially available and inexpensive tungsten cutters/grinders utilize diamond technology to provide clean, contamination free,
separation and grinding finish that prevents splintering/shattering of tips, prevents cross contamination, provides precise tip geometry for
desired weld shape, size, and penetration for consistency in welding (Cost savings in time, fewer repairs, extended electrode life).
2. QC surveillance shall ensure that the following GTAW practices regarding Tungsten consumables are carried out on SA Projects
A) Issue of properly prepared Tungsten electrodes (AWS A5.12 specification) is included in Consumable control measures. Use Issue slips
B) Prohibited are: 1) The unacceptable practice of field grinding tungsten. 2) The improper methods of removing contaminated or oxidized
tungsten tips such as breaking with wire cutters, breaking by hand with a hammer, or grinding off with silicon carbide wheel.
C) Early identification of welders using improper techniques (retrain and monitor welders until they produce quality results).
D) Redressing of contaminated or oxidized tips is done at a specified location using proper tip geometry.
Filler metal contamination: See Section 5 below for detailed In-Process GTAW Surveillance
IN-PROCESS MANUAL GTAW TECHNIQUE SURVEILLANCE
FOR MANUAL GTAW TECHNIQUE, there are SIX (6) basic areas for In-Process Surveillance (Page 3 covers purging practice):
Poor Practice shall be identified and corrected ASAP as part of an ongoing effort toward Continuing Process Improvement on IK Projects.
(1) ARC INITIATION & EFFECTS (5 types GTAW equipment are listed below): GTAW equipment for specific P-No is listed below.
High Frequency (HF) Start: Use for all P-No GTAW manual welds, mandatory* for P-No 5 & above, including dissimilar welds.
Use high frequency start & post-purge gas flow for the torch. SAES-W-011, Para 5.2.1 & SAES-W-016 Para 6.2 Also, a remote contactor
and current level control (pedal or torch mounted) is required. Pre-set power source current start/rise and decay/stop controls triggered by
a foot switch (remote foot pedal rheostat) or torch mounted control (finger control rheostat) is an acceptable alternative for remote control.
Note: GTAW for P-No 1, P-No 3 & P-No 4 materials shall utilize HF Start (above) or equipment below Except Touch or Scratch start.
Pulse Start/Capacitor Discharge: Used for machine or automatic welding (DC), not for manual GTAW
Automatic Pulsed (GTAW-P): When used for root pass welding of single-sided joints, welding shall be performed with the same make
and model of welding system using same equipment and/or program settings as those used in procedure quals. Comment: The need to
specify make & model, program, equipment settings & pulse waveform is based upon the effects these variables have on welding arc
performance, especially sidewall fusion and out-of-position welding. Studies verify considerable variation in arc characteristics when one
make or model of welding system is compared to another. Variation can lead to welding defects difficult to detect by RT (API 582 Par 5.2.1)
Touch or scratch start (Prohibited by COMPANY): With power source energized, contactor closed, & shielding gas flowing from cup,
torch is lowered toward the work piece until the tungsten electrode contacts with work piece. The torch is quickly withdrawn a short distance
to establish the arc. Depending on the instantaneous short circuit current capability of the welding power source, the current through the
welding electrode upon arc initiation may cause damage to the weld or the electrode. This is corrected by limiting the current upon arc start.
Touch starting has a tendency for electrodes to stick to the work causing electrode contamination & tungsten transfer.
Touch & Retract Starters: Touch and retract starters are similar to contact starting in that the tip of the electrode is lowered to make
contact with the work piece. However, the controls in this starter do not allow current to flow until the electrode begins to be withdrawn,
thus striking the arc. This eliminates the tendency for electrode contamination. Another variation involves a low current to be passed thru
the electrode, which heats the electrode tip and allows the arc to more easily be initiated upon retraction. Acceptable method per COMPANY
(2) CURRENT SELECTION (WPS ESSENTIAL VARIABLE) & CURRENT CONTROLS
Selection: Direct current electrode negative (DCEN*) & Direct current electrode positive (DCEP**) are two types of direct current used in
Page 24 of 29
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
GTAW. WPS terminology using DCSP* or straight polarity and DCRP** or reverse polarity is no longer standard terminology. *DCEN = DCSP
A) DCEN produces the greatest heat, deep joint penetration & faster welding. This is the most common configuration in SA, almost all WPS.
B) DCEP (DCEP = DCRP or reverse polarity) is extremely limited in use (3mm & less extremely thin aluminum & magnesium alloys)
C) AC is used in GTAW process at Saudi Aramco in similar applications to DCEP such as for P- No 23 Aluminum materials (ER4043 filler)
D) PROGRAMMED CURRENT - Combines AC & DC. Variable Polarity or VP is a type of programmed current. Not used in SA applications.
Programmable controllers: Programmable controllers control weld sequence, pulse, arc voltage, arc length, and other parameters)
Current Controls (See also HF Start): Current Control Mechanisms are listed below for GTAW process:
Remote foot pedal type & Finger control type rheostats - Arc control in DC welding machines uses a rheostat in welding circuit.
Contactor - A device that opens and closes an electrical circuit (Used in Touch Start Methods)
VERIFY that current type, current controls, electrode type, & shielding gas match a COMPANY approved WPS. - See Table below
Page 25 of 29
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
(3) TORCH MANIPULATION (TECHNIQUE & APPLICATION): Notes for inspector awareness are identified with an asterisk *
Walking the Cup*: A technique for manipulating the torch when manually welding groove & fillet welds. With this technique, the electrode
extension is adjusted* to allow the proper arc length* while the edge of the cup* rests on the side of the joint. The torch is manipulated in a
manner to swing the tip of the tungsten back & forth across the side of the joint by walking-the-cup on each edge of the joint. The left or
right edge of the gas nozzle/cup is in constant contact with the members giving the cup a walking motion on the weld joint. One limitation of
this technique is that it is very difficult* to walk-the-cup when welding pipe less than 2 in. [50 mm] in diameter*.
Dragging the Finger: A technique used in manual welding of all types of joint configurations. It can be used when welding all diameters
of pipe & tubing. A fingerstall is made by overlapping a sleeve of fiberglass matl approx 8 in. [200 mm] long. Fingerstall is placed over the
middle finger & should extend about 1 in. [25 mm] beyond the end of the finger. A Fingerstall stabilizes the hand holding the torch as it is slid
along during welding and provides added insulation and protection for the welder.
Brace Technique: Used in manual welding of vessels, very large pipe diameters and structures. In this technique, the welder stabilizes
the torch by resting his wrist, arm or elbow as far away from the weld zone as possible & sliding the wrist in the direction of welding.
Freehand Technique: This technique should be used only when no other technique is feasible. Very few welders create quality welds
without technique to stabilize the torch. Uncontrolled torch motion can lead to tungsten contact with work or filler. Ensure only the best
welders make joints in difficult field locations where freehand technique is used. Also increase surveillance and NDE as needed.
(4) WORK PIECE MANIPULATION
Planning for production: During the planning of welding operation sequence & qualifying welding procedures & welders, the welding
engineer must establish in which welding position the joint will be welded in production. Shop handling practices are found in SAIC-L-2031.
Manual Manipulation: For small pipe welds that can be rotated, it may be economical to make the welds using pipe rollers. Weld the top
quarter, then manually rotating the pipe & completing the weld in quarters. Other ways the weld joint can be manually positioned are by
physically moving the component or using lifting devices such as overhead cranes or universal balance positioners (manually operated).
(5) FILLER METAL ADDITION (For manual GTAW, only cut length Filler Wire is covered. Wire feed or autogenous welding is not allowed)
Filler Metal Addition: When retracting weld filler rod from the pool, care shall be exercised to ensure the hot end of the rod is not
removed from within the welding torchs protective gas envelope. If the end of the filler wire should become oxidized, then the oxidized end
shall be cut prior to using the remaining wire. Typically a pair of cutting pliers* is used in this process. (*Prohibited for cutting tungsten).
When welding a root pass, filler metal is normally held in one position and not manipulated. When welding filler and cover passes, filler metal
may be manipulated a slight amount based on joint opening. During welding, the welder must be careful not to touch the filler wire to the
tungsten electrode, since the electrode would become contaminated (Repair or replace).Prior to using filler wire, verify that the type of the
filler wire matches the filler material specified on the welding procedure. Additionally, assure cleanliness of filler material (no visible rust,
discoloration, or evidence of atmospheric contamination such as dust or residues. GTAW Filler metals shall be issued & stored in a portable
container such as a capped PVC tube. Welder training assures that approved consumable id and storage procedures are followed.
(6) EXTINGUISHING THE ARC: Care is taken to avoid forming crater cracks, porosity & start/stop weld defects. Perform close visual check
Welders can achieve this in several ways. After the arc has been extinguished, it is good practice to flow the shielding gas from the torch
over the end of the weld to permit this area to cool* under the protective gas. At the same time, this allows the tungsten electrode to cool
under the shielding gas and prevents its oxidation. Filler material ends are maintained under shielding gas to prevent their oxidation OR
any oxidized filler metal ends shall be cut (cutting tool pliers) each time arc is extinguished & filler becomes oxidized (every tack, stop, etc).
*Inert gas flow time over an extinguishing arc follows the "15 second rule" = Zero Contamination ... QC surveillance point*
Note: 15* seconds cooling under gas flow will result in zero oxidation. Time is dependent on application & can be less to achieve quality.
Decreasing the Current (Down Slope, Down Ramp): Decreasing current is one of the most effective methods for extinguishing the
arc. In this method, the size of the weld pool is decreased by decreasing the current with a foot or hand controlled rheostat.
Weld Tie-In: Moving the arc up and over to the side of the joint (while remaining in the joint) or over the previous pass or back stepping is
effective in minimizing disturbance of the final weld pool. A gradual breaking of the arc will reduce the possibility of porosity & crater crack.
Filling the Crater: A small quantity of filler can be added just as the electrode is withdrawn (& cools under gas) to compensate for weld
pool solidification shrinkage & provide a little extra filler material to help prevent a shrinkage cavity.
Inspect completed welds for undercut, underfill, excess penetration or reinforcement, crater cracks, & porosity
Page 26 of 29
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2005
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
GTAW PURGING PRACTICES

Acceptance Criteria (Oxidation)
The purge shall achieve actual oxygen levels inside or exiting the joint (via the vent) never greater than 50 ppm O2 (maximum 0.005%) prior
to and during welding, as measured with an O2 analyzer with low-level read-out capability. The actual oxygen levels achieved in
production shall be measured periodically (i.e., at the start of production work for each welder, and thereafter, on a random basis for the
number of joints to be performed). Analyzers shall be used for all joints if excessive internal oxidation is observed on any joints based on
the visual appearance of the oxide tint. Use the AWS C5.5 Figure 40 Oxidation Table for guidance, comparison & reporting.
1. 12 ppm O2 = No oxide tint ... ACCEPTABLE
2. 60-70 ppm O2 = Slight oxide tint visible ... Unacceptable
3. 70-90 ppm O2 = Slightly more visible oxide tint ... Unacceptable
4. 200 ppm O2 = Dark oxide tint ... Unacceptable
5. 250 ppm O2 = Almost Black oxide tint ... Unacceptable
6. 500 ppm O2 = (0.05%) = Black or sugared ... Unacceptable ... Likely will be a "Cut out" or weld metal repair
Comment: Discoloration (oxide tint) is dark at 200 parts per million or ppm O2, with a discernible tint at 60-70 ppm .
Welding procedure shall cover additional testing or disposition of those welds found with oxide tint or discoloration.
If no such procedure exists: See Disposition Below
Disposition of Oxidized Root Pass & Welds

Welds with internal oxidation, based on visual appearance of oxide tint as Inspected, shall be repaired or treated by COMPANY approved method
Treat or Passivate using an approved method such ASTM A380 practice or other COMPANY approved method.
PURGE DAM DETAILS

Purge Dams shall follow the detailed practices of AWS D10.11, Recommended Practices for Root Pass Welding. Due to a common problem
of leakage with proprietary dissolvable water-soluble dams, these shall be avoided whenever possible. If purge dams are to be used but
cannot be retrieved after welding, then proprietary dissolvable (water soluble paper such as rice paper, etc) dams shall be used and the
following stringent conditions for their application shall apply:
A) In addition, water-soluble approved low chloride glues* shall be used to hold the dams in place (Elmers glue is accepted in our Industry
for this exact purpose) or proprietary water soluble adhesive tape shall be applied to purge dams. Dams shall be located far enough from
the joint to prevent their failure during the welding process, usually 150-300 mm.
B) Before decreasing purge gas pressure and closing the weld joint, a visual inspection window shall be left open for Inspection to
verify acceptable root pass condition. This is an extremely quick inspection with a mini-light that determines any root oxidation.
Inspector specifies a 25 mm visual "window" & identifies visible oxide tint. Pass/Fail.
COMMENTARY: Currently, tape is being used in many instances on large bore pipe to hold these dams in place ... This is the only way the
dams stay put. Dams using rice paper often allow a high rate of gas escape & require multiple layers glued together to maintain purge.
Page 27 of 29
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2005
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
USE SATR-W-2011
1. Use a calibrated Volt/amp meter. Check readings adjacent to source & Work (without disturbing welder)
2. Welding Machines are calibrated per SAIC-W-2011 Checklist. SA Witness Point.
3. Have a Test Form to list values against welds made. Determine Acceptable Limits before Testing
4. Take valid readings. (10 Degree, 90 Degree Rule). Travel speed (& SMAW bead width) is critical.
5. Procedure shall have a disposition for retraining & disposition for unacceptable results.
TAKE H.I. MEASUREMENTS (Use the 10 degree - 90 degree rule)

Measurements in either 90 degree quadrant is used to validate H.I. Results (Pass/Fail)
Notes for H.I. Measurements
1. Take measurements for the
voltage & amperage when the
welder is welding in those two
quadrants shown in the sketch.
2. Travel speed measurements
are also taken in the same two
3. 100% checks of Heat Input is
required for all welders until
they establish their ability to
meet WPS Heat Input Values.
4. Testing may be reduced to a
random check once the Saudi
Page 28 of 29
Aramco authorized inspector
has accepted initial results.

5. Highly recommended is the
practice & testing of welders
during qualification and before
any production work to assure
sound welds within H.I. Limits
Page 29 of 29
SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID - 18-MAY-05 - REV 0 (Standards Cutoff -June 2008)
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-W-2006
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements Use this checklist in conjunction with SAIC-W-2005
A1
Stainless Steel & Corrosion-Resistant Piping Practices meet strict

Attachment 1 criteria (inspector must know):
A) Cross-contamination prevention practice is adequate
B) Welding Environment was acceptable
C) Joint Prep & Cleaning was acceptable
S-PM-G000-15200011, Section 12
&
Section 13
A2
Technique, Workmanship & Preheat is per Attachment 2:

A) Electrode type & Size limits
B) Minimum distance between Welds & Weld Encroachment
C) Preheat Requirements
S-PM-G000-15200011, Section 13
&
Section 14
A3
GTAW follows acceptable practice per Attachment 3:

A) Tungsten preparation, issue & repair using proper equipment
B) Welder Technique prevents oxidation of tungsten tips
C) Purging Practices & Purge Dams are adequate
S-PM-G000-15200011, Section 13
&
Section 14
SAIC-W-2005 has been followed (Every weld)
B1
All tacks or temporary welds are performed with the same care,
materials, electrodes, minimum preheat, & procedures that are used
for permanent welds. This includes back purging with gas.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.4.2
B2
Tack welds are sufficient size to maintain joint alignment. The tack
thickness is 3.2 to 4.8 mm and tack length is 12.5 to 25.4 mm.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.4.3
B3
The minimum number of tack welds are:

a) Pipe diameter of 101.6mm or less: three equally spaced tacks.
b) Pipe dia. > 101.6mm: minimum of four equally spaced tacks.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.4.3
B4
Tack welds to be incorporated into the final weld are thoroughly cleaned,
prepared (feathered) at each end, & inspected for cracks.
NOTE: Any cracked tacks shall be removed before welding joints.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.4.4
B5
If the tack welds are to be incorporated into the final root pass weld
and are made with a different process or electrode than the root pass,
then the tack weld process and electrode shall have been used as the
root pass for an appropriate procedure qualification.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.4.5
B6
Bridge tacks (located above the root area) are acceptable but such tacks
must be made completely within the weld groove and shall be
completely removed prior to completion of the weld.
Note: Tacks made outside the groove require MT/PT examination.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.4.6
Back Purging & Shielding Gas
C1
Inert gas is used for GTAW or GMAW root passes on single-sided

groove welds, on ASME P-No. 5 matls & above* & maintained until 2
layers of the weld deposit thickness is completed.
Note: Nitrogen as a backing gas for Austenitic SS is prohibited.
See Att. 3, Page 3 for GTAW Purging Practices
Page 1 of 24
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.13.1 to
13.13.3
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.
QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
SYSTEM ID.
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

SAIC-W-2006
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C2
The back purge for stainless steel and nickel alloys shall reduce the
oxygen level below 0.05%. An oxygen analyzer should be used to
determine the oxygen content inside the pipe during purging. If more
S-PM-G000-1520than 20 joints are to be welded at the same time then minimum of 10% of
0011,
the total joints shall be analyzed. The below formula is used to achieve
Para. 13.13.5
the required purging time: See Att. 1 & Photo
GTAW Practices shall follow AWS C5.5 & AWS D10.11 with regard to
purge dams and purge gas containment.
C3
Forced or accelerated cooling of welds is prohibited without the specific

approval of COMPANY.
Root , Hot & Final Pass
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.17
D1
The direction of welding conforms with the WPS.

(NOTE: If the WPS is not qualified in the vertical position, then the
direction of welding shall be vertical-up. )
D2
Each weld pass is thoroughly cleaned and all slag or other foreign matter S-PM-G000-1520removed before the next pass is deposited. NOTE: See WPS remarks for
0011,
Para. 13.3.1
cleaning method, e.g. mechanical brush.
D3
Root pass is deposited without backing for WPS qualified for single-sided
groove welds without backing.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.4.10
D4
GTAW process shall* be used for root pass of all piping single side
groove welds and set in nozzles.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 7.2.3
D5
The back purge for stainless steel and nickel alloys shall done to reduce
the oxygen level below 0.05%.(refer WPS for same). Recommended
Where no oxygen analyzer was used, a visual insp (25 mm window) was
performed. See Att 3, Page 3 Purge shall be maintained until deposition
reaches 10 mm*
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.14.4
D6
SAW Flux fused during welding shall not be reused (i.e., fluxes that use
recrushed slag are not acceptable).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.5.2
D7
Maximum SMAW electrode size to be used are:

A) Low hydrogen electrode - 5 mm in 1G/1F position, 4 mm all other
B) Non-low hydrogen electrodes - 5 mm for all positions.
SAES-W-011,
Para. 11.1
D8
Remote Current controls are used if welding is more than 30 m from

welding a power source or when welders work in "remote" areas
Note: Welding in elevated pipe racks shall meet this requirement.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 21.1
D9
Heat input (HI) of each* production weld is calculated (using formula

below) if Charpy impact is specified on the WPS, and then confirmed not
to exceed the heat input limits listed in the WPS's.
HI (kj/cm) = Volt X Amp X 60/Travel Speed (cm/min)
See Attachment 4.
Note: ensure above HI values as per WPS are maintained by each
welder, perform random monitoring of welders
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 21.3
D10
Adjacent beads of a weld shall be staggered and not started in the same
location.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.12
Page 2 of 24
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.4.7.1
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2006
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
D11
All full penetration joints requiring double sided welding shall be ground or
gouged to sound metal & inspected by penetrant test (PT) or magnetic
particle testing (MT) prior to welding the reverse side, unless exempted
by S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Para. 9.4.10 as follows: For the exempt
S-PM-G000-1520applications, production results shall demonstrate that acceptable
0011,
Para. 13.2.4
penetration can be reliably achieved. If periodic lack-of-penetration
defects are found, then backgouging will be mandatory for joint
geometries other than butt welds and either backgouging or 100%
radiography will be required for butt welds.
D12
Unless specified otherwise, maximum interpass temperatures are:

A) 177C for P-No. 8 and P-No. 4x materials
B) 315C for P-1,P3, P-4 and P-5 steels.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 14.7
D13
Unless specified in the WPS, back welding is done using the same
process, consumables and preheat as the fill passes.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.16
D14
Forced or accelerated cooling of welds is prohibited without the specific

approval of COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.17
D15
All slag, flux, weld spatter, and undercuts are removed from the
completed weld and surrounding areas.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.3.2
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS:
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 2 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 TECHNIQUE, WORKMANSHIP & PREHEATING
Attachment 3 - GTAW PRACTICES (CONSUMABLE CONTROL, TECHNIQUE, PURGING)
2.
3.
12-SAMSS-007, Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel (30 April 2005)
4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Steel Welding Code (2004 Edition)
5. American Welding Society (AWS) C5.5 Recommended Practices for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (2003 Edition)
6. ASME B31.3, Process Piping, (2007 Edition). ASME SEC II Part C Specs for Welding Rods, Electrodes & Filler Metals, (2005 Edition)
8. ASME SEC IX - Qual. Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators, (2005)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 3 of 24
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2006
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-

F
F1
F2
F3
F4
Austenitic Stainless Steel & Nickel Alloy Shop (Per SAIC-L-2031)

Cross-Contamination Measures (Shop & Field)
Stainless Steel & Nickel Alloy Weld Shops address material Handling & Storage,
Fabrication & Shipping per Piping Fabrication Institute (PFI) Standard ES-43.
Stainless Steel & Nickel Alloy Shops are safely & properly ventillated (ANSI Z49.1).
Adequate air movers lift toxic fumes. Check for Confined spaces in the field*.
Handle Austenitic stainless steel & nickel alloys with nylon slings or equipment protected
with a non-contaminating buffer mat'l.
Conduct a visual exam of both internal & external surfaces to detect existing
contamination or gouges caused by contact with contaminating material.
Check APPLY 100% IN WELD SHOPS,

any Fail FIELD APPLICATION IS AS SHOWN
PFI-ES-43, Sec 1
Field use as
applicable
PFI-ES-43, Sec 1
*Check in field
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.1
Check in field
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.2
Check in field
N/A field
F5
Fittings are stored on pallets or shelving constructed of non-contaminating material
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.3
F6
Storage areas for these matls are separate from areas where CS material is stored.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.4
N/A field
F7
SS material stored outdoors was covered (water repellent sheet, etc).
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.5
Check in field
F8
CS strapping is used if a durable, non-contaminating mat'l (clean wood, cardboard, cloth,

paper & SS buffer) isolates the strapping from contact with the stainless steel or nickel
alloy. Gray duct tape (high chlorides) is absolutely prohibited
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.6
Check in field
F9
Walking on austenitic SS or nickel alloy material is not allowed.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 2.7
Check in field
F10
Contact surfaces of tools & equipment* containing CS, zinc, copper or their alloys are
covered in noncontaminating matl. (Shall be adequate to prevent cross-contamination)
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.1
Check in field
*scaffold, etc
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.2
Check in field
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.3
Check in field
F11
F12
Tools (grinding wheel, wire brush, etc) are color coded and used ONLY for each
specific metal. Hawiyeh Lessons Learned (copper contamination / SS)
Grinding discs, abrasive discs & belts are "labelled for SS" and made of resin-bonded
alumina, silicon carbide or zirconium carbide. (No Sulphurized items)
F13
Only 300 series SS brushes are used on austenitic & nickel alloys.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.4
Check in field
F14
All material removal & cleaning tools are marked to identify that they are to be used on
specific austenitic & nickel alloy materials only. Marking is visible while a tool is in use.
(Purple & other color codes). Different grades of alloys use new/ differ
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.5
Check in field
F15
Austenitic & nickel alloy material fabrication areas are separated from CS areas (upwind to
prevent cross contamination).
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.6
Field avoids
contamination
F16
Suitable methods prevent cross contamination by CS shavings, grinding dust, and zinc dust
from coating operations by Enclosure, separation & location of work areas OR Engineering
controls & ventillation assure cleanliness & safety
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.6
Check in field
Field shielding
as suitable
F17
Where tape is used for back purging, the tape uses an adhesive with a water soluble
chloride content not exceeding 50 ppm. Gray duct tape is prohibited (chlorides)
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.7
Check in field
F18
Pressure-sensitive & adhesive-backed tape is removed (along with any adhesive residue)
using a suitable solvent or abrasive.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.8
Check in field
F19
Cutting fluids or oils are low halogen, low sulphur & are completely removed from all
surfaces prior to any welding or forming.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 3.9
Check in field
F20
Shipping of materials uses new packing matls & shipping protectors such as PVC caps,
plugs, & new adhesive tapes. No harmful substances are used in shipping.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.1
Check in field
staging areas
F21
Certified chloride-free marking or color coding has a water soluble chloride content
below 50 ppm (measured after drying). Weld ID is marked per SAIC-W-2008
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.2
Check in field
F22
ID tags & Attachment devices used are made of noncontaminating materials.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.3
Check in field
F23
Austenitic stainless steel & nickel alloys are handled in a manner that will minimize the risk
of material becoming contaminated. Small segments use caution (controls)
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.4
Check in field
F24
Alloys on same load as CS matl are segregated by wood bracing or other suited matl.
PFI-ES-43, Sec 4.4
Check in field
NOTES: 1) Prevent costly cross contamination repairs* (*Cleaning/passivation per ASTM A380 methods shall be COMPANY approved).
2) Where cross contamination occurs, do not allow welding. If rust is not yet visible, Water-wet with pure Demin/distilled water to form rust using
clean soaked rag on suspect areas. Wet-dry cycles allows test areas to remain dry for a total of 8 hrs in a 24-hr test period. (Pass) shows no
evidence of rust stains or corrosion product. Fact: Once cross-contamination occurs, rust will remain until repaired.
3)
Copper Contamination in SS (From CuNi electrodes, grinders, etc) exists when PMI Cu values exceed 0.7% - See Hawiyah LL).
Page 4 of 24
F-11 & F12 Color Coding of cutter & grinders (yellow tape = 316L mat'l only) & discs used for SS works
F-10 Examples of Approved Shop with acceptable "buffer material" to prevent Cross contamination
Page 5 of 24
Creative yet simple Jigs & Restraints with buffer mat'l prevent welding distortion and cross contamination
Page 6 of 24
Item F-10 Inspector Caution: Prevent Copper Contamination of Stainless Steel at grounding points Ground
Clamps must be similar metallurgy or as shown here, quality 316L SS overlay welds were made.
Page 7 of 24
Typical GTAW (Tig) rig with portable pallet making a weld. Note the taped ends using an approved tape low in
chlorides (Never allow gray duct tape in SS Shop). Lastly, 316L electrodes without color code ends
Page 8 of 24
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (Photo Example of Approved SS Shop)
Attachment 1 - Stainless Steel Practices (Photo Examples of CS Contamination of SS piping)

Note 1: Passivation Cleaning per ASTM A380 is now required (or COMPANY approved other method)
Note 2: Examples are from Vendor supplied skid-mounted Pumps (Associated piping)
Page 9 of 24
Page 10 of 24

Lessons Learned Summary: Always make sure everything in a SS & Non-Ferrous Material Shop & in the field is
field is color coded / segregated, especially CuNi electrodes (coat them green on the ends). Take steps
early to completely segregate and color code all materials, electrodes, and especially Tools such as
cutting wheels, grinders, brushes FOR EACH SPECIFIC MATERIAL USED ON THE JOB. Note the unusual
discoloration of the Copper Contaminated 316L SS welds in the COMPANY photos below. In the final analysis,
PMI results showing Copper Content greater than 0.7% indicate unacceptable "cross contamination".
Page 11 of 24
Page 12 of 24
COMPANY
COMPANY
COMPANY
Photo below shows both ERCuNi & ER316L Electrodes - Highlighting need for color coding electrode ends
Page 13 of 24
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2006
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
ATTACHMENT 2 -S-PM-G000-1520-0011 TECHNIQUE, WORKMANSHIP & PREHEATING
Page 14 of 24
ATTACHMENT 2 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 TECHNIQUE, WORKMANSHIP & PREHEATING
Page 15 of 24
Page 16 of 24
Page 17 of 24
Page 18 of 24
Page 19 of 24
Page 20 of 24
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2006
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
ATT. 3 - GTAW PRACTICES (CONSUMABLE CONTROL, TECHNIQUE, PURGING)

GTAW CONSUMABLES (CONTROL & SURVEILLANCE)
Welders shall prevent tungsten electrode contact with work (including molten pool). If this happens, welders shall extinguish the arc &
of silicon carbide type* grinding wheels results in contamination of tungsten & inconsistent tip quality. *Prohibited per CSD.
Quality Step (CSD approved, Required for shop approval): Procedures & surveillance shall ensure proper shop & field practices:
1. Properly prepare new tungsten electrodes by using diamond type cutting equipment specifically designed for Tungsten (Piranha, etc)
These commercially available and inexpensive tungsten cutters/grinders utilize diamond technology to provide clean, contamination free,
separation and grinding finish that prevents splintering/shattering of tips, prevents cross contamination, provides precise tip geometry for
desired weld shape, size, and penetration for consistency in welding (Cost savings in time, fewer repairs, extended electrode life).
2. QC surveillance shall ensure that the following GTAW practices regarding Tungsten consumables are carried out on SA Projects
A) Issue of properly prepared Tungsten electrodes (AWS A5.12 specification) is included in Consumable control measures. Use Issue slips
B) Prohibited are: 1) The unacceptable practice of field grinding tungsten. 2) The improper methods of removing contaminated or oxidized
tungsten tips such as breaking with wire cutters, breaking by hand with a hammer, or grinding off with silicon carbide wheel.
C) Early identification of welders using improper techniques (retrain and monitor welders until they produce quality results).
D) Redressing of contaminated or oxidized tips is done at a specified location using proper tip geometry.
Filler metal contamination: See Section 5 below for detailed In-Process GTAW Surveillance
IN-PROCESS MANUAL GTAW TECHNIQUE SURVEILLANCE
FOR MANUAL GTAW TECHNIQUE, there are SIX (6) basic areas for In-Process Surveillance (Page 3 covers purging practice):
Poor Practice shall be identified and corrected ASAP as part of an ongoing effort toward Continuing Process Improvement on IK Projects.
(1) ARC INITIATION & EFFECTS (5 types GTAW equipment are listed below): GTAW equipment for specific P-No is listed below.
High Frequency (HF) Start: Use for all P-No GTAW manual welds, mandatory* for P-No 5 & above, including dissimilar welds.
Use high frequency start & post-purge gas flow for the torch. SAES-W-011, Para 5.2.1 & SAES-W-016 Para 6.2 Also, a remote contactor
and current level control (pedal or torch mounted) is required. Pre-set power source current start/rise and decay/stop controls triggered by
a foot switch (remote foot pedal rheostat) or torch mounted control (finger control rheostat) is an acceptable alternative for remote control.
Note: GTAW for P-No 1, P-No 3 & P-No 4 materials shall utilize HF Start (above) or equipment below Except Touch or Scratch start.
Pulse Start/Capacitor Discharge: Used for machine or automatic welding (DC), not for manual GTAW
Automatic Pulsed (GTAW-P): When used for root pass welding of single-sided joints, welding shall be performed with the same make
and model of welding system using same equipment and/or program settings as those used in procedure quals. Comment: The need to
specify make & model, program, equipment settings & pulse waveform is based upon the effects these variables have on welding arc
performance, especially sidewall fusion and out-of-position welding. Studies verify considerable variation in arc characteristics when one
make or model of welding system is compared to another. Variation can lead to welding defects difficult to detect by RT (API 582 Par 5.2.1)
Touch or scratch start (Prohibited by COMPANY): With power source energized, contactor closed, & shielding gas flowing from cup,
torch is lowered toward the work piece until the tungsten electrode contacts with work piece. The torch is quickly withdrawn a short distance
to establish the arc. Depending on the instantaneous short circuit current capability of the welding power source, the current through the
welding electrode upon arc initiation may cause damage to the weld or the electrode. This is corrected by limiting the current upon arc start.
Touch starting has a tendency for electrodes to stick to the work causing electrode contamination & tungsten transfer.
Touch & Retract Starters: Touch and retract starters are similar to contact starting in that the tip of the electrode is lowered to make
contact with the work piece. However, the controls in this starter do not allow current to flow until the electrode begins to be withdrawn,
thus striking the arc. This eliminates the tendency for electrode contamination. Another variation involves a low current to be passed thru
the electrode, which heats the electrode tip and allows the arc to more easily be initiated upon retraction. Acceptable method per CSD
(2) CURRENT SELECTION (WPS ESSENTIAL VARIABLE) & CURRENT CONTROLS
Selection: Direct current electrode negative (DCEN*) & Direct current electrode positive (DCEP**) are two types of direct current used in
GTAW. WPS terminology using DCSP* or straight polarity and DCRP** or reverse polarity is no longer standard terminology. *DCEN = DCSP
A) DCEN produces the greatest heat, deep joint penetration & faster welding. This is the most common configuration in SA, almost all WPS.
B) DCEP (DCEP = DCRP or reverse polarity) is extremely limited in use (3mm & less extremely thin aluminum & magnesium alloys)
C) AC is used in GTAW process at Saudi Aramco in similar applications to DCEP such as for P- No 23 Aluminum materials (ER4043 filler)
D) PROGRAMMED CURRENT - Combines AC & DC. Variable Polarity or VP is a type of programmed current. Not used in SA applications.
Programmable controllers: Programmable controllers control weld sequence, pulse, arc voltage, arc length, and other parameters)
Current Controls (See also HF Start): Current Control Mechanisms are listed below for GTAW process:
Remote foot pedal type & Finger control type rheostats - Arc control in DC welding machines uses a rheostat in welding circuit.
Contactor - A device that opens and closes an electrical circuit (Used in Touch Start Methods)
VERIFY that current type, current controls, electrode type, & shielding gas match a COMPANY approved WPS. - See Table below
Page 21 of 24
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2006
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
(3) TORCH MANIPULATION (TECHNIQUE & APPLICATION): Notes for inspector awareness are identified with an asterisk *
Walking the Cup*: A technique for manipulating the torch when manually welding groove & fillet welds. With this technique, the electrode
extension is adjusted* to allow the proper arc length* while the edge of the cup* rests on the side of the joint. The torch is manipulated in a
manner to swing the tip of the tungsten back & forth across the side of the joint by walking-the-cup on each edge of the joint. The left or
right edge of the gas nozzle/cup is in constant contact with the members giving the cup a walking motion on the weld joint. One limitation of
this technique is that it is very difficult* to walk-the-cup when welding pipe less than 2 in. [50 mm] in diameter*.
Dragging the Finger: A technique used in manual welding of all types of joint configurations. It can be used when welding all diameters
of pipe & tubing. A fingerstall is made by overlapping a sleeve of fiberglass matl approx 8 in. [200 mm] long. Fingerstall is placed over the
middle finger & should extend about 1 in. [25 mm] beyond the end of the finger. A Fingerstall stabilizes the hand holding the torch as it is slid
along during welding and provides added insulation and protection for the welder.
Brace Technique: Used in manual welding of vessels, very large pipe diameters and structures. In this technique, the welder stabilizes
the torch by resting his wrist, arm or elbow as far away from the weld zone as possible & sliding the wrist in the direction of welding.
Freehand Technique: This technique should be used only when no other technique is feasible. Very few welders create quality welds
without technique to stabilize the torch. Uncontrolled torch motion can lead to tungsten contact with work or filler. Ensure only the best
welders make joints in difficult field locations where freehand technique is used. Also increase surveillance and NDE as needed.
(4) WORK PIECE MANIPULATION
Planning for production: During the planning of welding operation sequence & qualifying welding procedures & welders, the welding
engineer must establish in which welding position the joint will be welded in production. Shop handling practices are found in SAIC-L-2031.
Manual Manipulation: For small pipe welds that can be rotated, it may be economical to make the welds using pipe rollers. Weld the top
quarter, then manually rotating the pipe & completing the weld in quarters. Other ways the weld joint can be manually positioned are by
physically moving the component or using lifting devices such as overhead cranes or universal balance positioners (manually operated).
(5) FILLER METAL ADDITION (For manual GTAW, only cut length Filler Wire is covered. Wire feed or autogenous welding is not allowed)
Filler Metal Addition: When retracting weld filler rod from the pool, care shall be exercised to ensure the hot end of the rod is not
filler wire matches the filler material specified on the welding procedure. Additionally, assure cleanliness of filler material (no visible rust,
discoloration, or evidence of atmospheric contamination such as dust or residues. GTAW Filler metals shall be issued & stored in a portable
container such as a capped PVC tube. Welder training assures that approved consumable id and storage procedures are followed.
(6) EXTINGUISHING THE ARC: Care is taken to avoid forming crater cracks, porosity & start/stop weld defects. Perform close visual check
Welders can achieve this in several ways. After the arc has been extinguished, it is good practice to flow the shielding gas from the torch
over the end of the weld to permit this area to cool* under the protective gas. At the same time, this allows the tungsten electrode to cool
under the shielding gas and prevents its oxidation. Filler material ends are maintained under shielding gas to prevent their oxidation OR
any oxidized filler metal ends shall be cut (cutting tool pliers) each time arc is extinguished & filler becomes oxidized (every tack, stop, etc).
*Inert gas flow time over an extinguishing arc follows the "15 second rule" = Zero Contamination ... QC surveillance point*
Note: 15* seconds cooling under gas flow will result in zero oxidation. Time is dependent on application & can be less to achieve quality.
Decreasing the Current (Down Slope, Down Ramp): Decreasing current is one of the most effective methods for extinguishing the
arc. In this method, the size of the weld pool is decreased by decreasing the current with a foot or hand controlled rheostat.
Weld Tie-In: Moving the arc up and over to the side of the joint (while remaining in the joint) or over the previous pass or back stepping is
effective in minimizing disturbance of the final weld pool. A gradual breaking of the arc will reduce the possibility of porosity & crater crack.
Filling the Crater: A small quantity of filler can be added just as the electrode is withdrawn (& cools under gas) to compensate for weld
pool solidification shrinkage & provide a little extra filler material to help prevent a shrinkage cavity.
Inspect completed welds for undercut, underfill, excess penetration or reinforcement, crater cracks, & porosity
Page 22 of 24
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2006
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
GTAW PURGING PRACTICES

Acceptance Criteria (Oxidation)
The purge shall achieve actual oxygen levels inside or exiting the joint (via the vent) never greater than 50 ppm O2 (maximum 0.005%) prior
to and during welding, as measured with an O2 analyzer with low-level read-out capability. The actual oxygen levels achieved in
production shall be measured periodically (i.e., at the start of production work for each welder, and thereafter, on a random basis for the
number of joints to be performed). Analyzers shall be used for all joints if excessive internal oxidation is observed on any joints based on
the visual appearance of the oxide tint. Use the AWS C5.5 Figure 40 Oxidation Table for guidance, comparison & reporting.
1. 12 ppm O2 = No oxide tint ... ACCEPTABLE
2. 60-70 ppm O2 = Slight oxide tint visible ... Unacceptable
3. 70-90 ppm O2 = Slightly more visible oxide tint ... Unacceptable
4. 200 ppm O2 = Dark oxide tint ... Unacceptable
5. 250 ppm O2 = Almost Black oxide tint ... Unacceptable
6. 500 ppm O2 = (0.05%) = Black or sugared ... Unacceptable ... Likely will be a "Cut out" or weld metal repair
Comment: Discoloration (oxide tint) is dark at 200 parts per million or ppm O2, with a discernible tint at 60-70 ppm .
Welding procedure shall cover additional testing or disposition of those welds found with oxide tint or discoloration.
If no such procedure exists: See Disposition Below
Disposition of Oxidized Root Pass & Welds

Welds with internal oxidation, based on visual appearance of oxide tint as Inspected, shall be repaired or treated by CSD approved method
Treat or Passivate using an approved method such ASTM A380 practice or other CSD approved method.
PURGE DAM DETAILS

Purge Dams shall follow the detailed practices of AWS D10.11, Recommended Practices for Root Pass Welding. Due to a common problem
of leakage with proprietary dissolvable water-soluble dams, these shall be avoided whenever possible. If purge dams are to be used but
cannot be retrieved after welding, then proprietary dissolvable (water soluble paper such as rice paper, etc) dams shall be used and the
following stringent conditions for their application shall apply:
the joint to prevent their failure during the welding process, usually 150-300 mm.
B) Before decreasing purge gas pressure and closing the weld joint, a visual inspection window shall be left open for Inspection to
verify acceptable root pass condition. This is an extremely quick inspection with a mini-light that determines any root oxidation.
Inspector specifies a 25 mm visual "window" & identifies visible oxide tint. Pass/Fail.
COMMENTARY: Currently, tape is being used in many instances on large bore pipe to hold these dams in place ... This is the only way the
dams stay put. Dams using rice paper often allow a high rate of gas escape & require multiple layers glued together to maintain purge.
Page 23 of 24
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2006
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
USE SATR-W-2011
1. Use a calibrated Volt/amp meter. Check readings adjacent to source & Work (without disturbing welder)
2. Welding Machines are calibrated per SAIC-W-2011 Checklist. SA Witness Point.
3. Have a Test Form to list values against welds made. Determine Acceptable Limits before Testing
4. Take valid readings. (10 Degree, 90 Degree Rule). Travel speed (& SMAW bead width) is critical.
5. Procedure shall have a disposition for retraining & disposition for unacceptable results.
TAKE H.I. MEASUREMENTS (Use the 10 degree - 90 degree rule)

Measurements in either 90 degree quadrant is used to validate H.I. Results (Pass/Fail)
Notes for H.I. Measurements
1. Take measurements for the
voltage & amperage when the
welder is welding in those two
2. Travel speed measurements
are also taken in the same two
3. 100% checks of Heat Input is
required for all welders until
they establish their ability to
meet WPS Heat Input Values.
4. Testing may be reduced to a
random check once the Saudi
Aramco authorized inspector
has accepted initial results.
5. Highly recommended is the
practice & testing of welders
during qualification and before
any production work to assure
sound welds within H.I. Limits
Page 24 of 24
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Post-Welding Visual Inspection (Plant Piping)
SAIC-W-2007
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements
A1
All slag, flux and spatter is removed from the completed weld and
surrounding area.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.3.2
A2
All arc strikes, gouges & other surface imperfections are removed by
grinding.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.5
A3
Temporary attachments have been cut off no closer than 3mm to the base
metal, then ground flush.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.6
A4
Grinding does not reduce the base metal thickness to less than the
design thickness. Inspectors know their specs & mill tolerances.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.7
A5
Where temporary welds were removed, base metal repairs made, or arc
strikes repaired by grinding, examination by MT or LT has been carried
out.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.8
A6
Weld numbering & welder symbols are placed in a location so that they
will remain visible for a time suitable to the authorized COMPANY
inspector. (Thru successful pressure test until coating).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 18.1
A8
Surface irregularities, including weld reinforcement, which inhibit accurate S-PM-G000-1520interpretation of specified method of NDT (including VT) are ground
0011,
smooth.
Para. 19.1.7
A9
Inspection of all welds includes a band of base metal at least 25mm wide
on each side of the weld. (Includes 100% HAZ as needed)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.8
A10
Visual defects found in completed welds & at least 25mm wide on each
side of the weld are within the allowable weld imperfections listed in
ASME B31.3, Table 341.3.2. See Attachment 1.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.7 &
19.1.8
A11
SOCKET WELDS & SEAL WELDED THREADED JOINTS MEET THE

REQUIREMENTS OF SAIC-L-2015 & SAIC-W-2037.
COMPANY Requirements for these welds supercede ASME code.
As referenced
A12
All weld to be FBE coated either Internal or External shall be ground

smooth and free from burrs, weld spatter,sharp edges. Weld toes shall be
merged smoothly and rounded with no sharp undercuts. The weld cap or
internal root protrusion shall not be more than 1.5 mm.
SAES-H-201
Para.7.2.2
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
12/11/2013
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
ASME B31.3 Code Table 341.3.2 Use (Visual & NDE Acceptance Criteria) ... See Attachment 1 Acceptance Criteria for Welds and
Examination Methods for Evaluating Weld Imperfections & Fig. 341.3.2 Typical Weld Imperfections
NOTE: FBE COATED LINES MUST RECEIVE FINAL INTERNAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF ROOT PASS
B1
Visually inspect finished welds (including root profile) to confirm the height
S-PM-G000-1520& width of reinforcement, technique of cap (multi-pass or weave), comply
0011,
with WPS. {ASME B31.3, Para. 341.4.1, (a) (1)}, See Attachment-I for
Para. 19.5.1.1
correct profile & acceptance limits
B2
Where accessible, welds shall be visually examined from

the root side to ensure that proper penetration and fusion
have been achieved.
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para.
19.5.1.2
B3
Zero Cracks are accepted (Refer ASME B31.3, Para. 341.4.2 ) & any
repair of cracks that are fabrication related shall require the approval of
Saudi Aramco assigned inspector.
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para. 20.2
Page 1 of 12
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-W-2007
PROJECT TITLE
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B4
S-PM-G000-1520LOP & LOF shall be carefully examined against acceptance limit by visual
0011,
examination (refer ASME B31.3, Para. 341.4.2 )
Para. 19.5.1.1
Welding of special corrosion-resistant piping Materials
C1
Back purging for stainless steels and nickel alloys has reduced O2 levels
to prevent root pass oxidation/tint. See SAIC-W-2006.
Where accessible, Visual inspection verifies this quality.
Note: Observance of any oxide tint shall be evaluated & properly
dispositioned per SAIC-W-2006 measures .
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 11.13.5
C2
Weld of corrosion-resistant material shall have weld surfaces and heat

affected zones free of dark colored and heavy 'sugary' oxidization,
pinholes, cracks, crevices, undercut, lack of penetration and incomplete
fusion
SAES-W-016,
Para. 6.9.1
C3
If the root ID surface can be visually inspected, the stop/starts shall be

examined. No crater defects, such as cracks, "suck-back," or
shrinkage,are permitted.
SAES-W-016,
Para. 6.9.1
WELD-
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
HEAT INPUT RECORDS (EACH WELD)
D1
Heat input (HI) of each production weld is calculated (using formula

below) if notch-toughness tests are specified, and then confirmed not to
exceed the heat input limits listed in the WPS's.
HI (kj/cm) = Volt X Amp X 60/Travel Speed (cm/min)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 21.3
D2
Welds failing Heat Input Requirements (outside acceptable ranges) are

dispositioned (repairs/welder retraining/etc) per an approved procedure
(Welding Process Control Procedure Element).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 21.3
Attachment 3 - Structural Steel In-Process Welding Requirements & Repairs (AWS D1.1)
2.
3.
12-SAMSS-007, Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel (30 April 2005)
4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Steel Welding Code (Applicable Edition)
5. American Welding Society (AWS) C5.5 Recommended Practices for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (2003 Edition)
6. ASME B31.3, Process Piping, (2008)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 12
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2007
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1 - Process Piping Welding Acceptance Criteria
ASME B31.3 EQUAL LEG FILLET WELD (Fig 328.5.2A) - Acceptable Fillet Weld Shape & Contour
Note: Leg Size shall be determined by Fillet Gage* (Properly Used Depending upon the weld contour)
Page 3 of 12
Page 4 of 12
Page 5 of 12
Attachment 1 - Process Piping Welding Acceptance Criteria (FBE COATED LINES)
Note 1: Root pass Conditions "c", "d", "e", & "f" (Refer to ASME B31.3 sketch above) is not
acceptable when evaluating internal weld root pass profiles for FBE Coated Lines. Porosity /
spatter / sharp edged discontinuities are considered unacceptable defects that require repair
or grinding per Company SAES-H-201 Specification, Para. 7.2.2
Warning: SMAW & GMAW/STT process produce spatter that sticks to internal surfaces and
these processes must be limited to welds where internal grinding / cleaning is accessible.
Spatter & other sharp imperfections must be ground smooth. Welders initial root passes on
FBE Lines are an Inspection HOLD POINT (Window Technique). Retrain or remove from
duties any welder who is unable to consistently meet root reinforcement requirements per
COMPANY specifications. Reject any irregular root pass profile ASAP.
Note 2: Excess internal & external reinforcement for FBE Coated Lines shall be Welding
Inspector's TOP PRIORITY at start of WORK. Welders must be able to deposit maximum root
/ cap of 2.5mm or less. Excess root or cap reinforcement is unacceptable. Utilize the "window
technique" and maintain an Inspection "Hold Point" on initial production, until the welder's
ability to deposit small consistent root passes is "unquestionable".
Note 3: Internal root reinforcement is directly proportional to root gap opening on fit-up.
Rule # 1: Never allow fit-ups to exceed 2.5mm root openings (GTAW process)
Reason: Larger gaps result in greater penetration unacceptable per COMPANY specs.
Rule # 2: GMAW/STT process is highly dependent upon consistent, even fit-ups with gaps
kept to about 1.5 mm. Bigger gaps are not advised and may result in rejected roots.
Rule # 3: Do not allow SMAW process! E60 (Cellulosic) and E70 Series low hydrogen
electrodes deposit spatter and require 100% access for POWER GRINDING.
Note 4: GTAW Process is mandatory for all lines that will be less than 24" in diameter.
Reason: Internal access to remove spatter (GMAW/STT Process) is impossible as a general
rule. This diameter limitation (24") is determined by the ability to SAFELY go inside piping
spools and manually clean / inspect welds.
Note 5: When liquid coating systems will be employed, internal pressure blasting at 90 psi or
greater will remove any GMAW/STT spatter for any piping diameter.
Page 6 of 12
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
WELDPost-Welding Visual Inspection (Plant Piping)

SAIC-W-2007
11-Dec-13
AWS D1.1 --- 5.24 Weld Profiles - All welds, except as otherwise allowed below, shall be free from cracks, overlap,
and the unacceptable profile discontinuities exhibited in Figure 5.4. FILLET SIZE SHALL BE MEASURED (GAGE).
5.24.1 Fillet Welds: The faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, flat, or slightly concave as shown in Figure 5.4
Figure 5.4(C) shows UNACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES. THESE ARE NEVER* ALLOWED AT SA.
* Inspectors accepting such welds are subject to retraining & rating of "Unsatisfactory Field Performance".
* INSPECTORS FINDING POOR WORKMANSHIP SHALL NOTIFY THEIR QA/QC MGR & THE SA INSPECTOR.
5.24.3 Convexity:. Except at outside welds in corner joints, the convexity C of a weld or individual surface bead
shall not exceed the values given in Figure 5.4.(1/16" to 3/16" per Table) --> FILLET SIZES SHALL BE SPECIFIED
IF FILLET SIZE IS UNKNOWN, INSPECTOR ENSURES ENGINEERING DIRECTION IS PROVIDED AS NEEDED.
5.14 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes - The minimum fillet weld size, except for fillet welds used to reinforce groove
welds, shall be as shown in Table 5.8. The minimum fillet weld size shall apply in all cases, unless the design
drawings specify welds of a larger size. AGAIN, DESIGN DRAWINGS SHALL SPECIFY A FILLET SIZE!
CAUTION: MANDATORY HOLD POINT FOR DWG & SPECIFICATION CHECK FOR CORRECT FILLET SIZE
Page 7 of 12

AWS D1.1 - Section 6.9 (Visual Inspection)
All welds shall be visually inspected and shall be acceptable if the criteria of Table 6.1 are satisfied.
LOAD TYPE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE SPECIFIED (PROVIDE ADEQUATE EVALUATION CRITERIA)
Page 8 of 12

5.24.4 Groove or Butt Welds: Groove welds shall be made with minimum face reinforcement unless otherwise
specified. In the case of butt and corner joints, face reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm] in height.
All welds shall have a gradual transition to the plane of base-metal surfaces with transition areas free from undercut
except as allowed by this code. Figure 5.4(D) shows typically acceptable groove weld profiles in butt joints.
Figure 5.4(E) shows typically unacceptable weld profiles for groove weld butt joints. *NEVER ALLOWED.
Butt Joint Misalignment (5.22.3)
5.23.8 - FLANGE WARPAGE & TILT (WELDING DISTORTION)

1% of total flg width or 1/4" (6mm) whichever is greater & "Exception"
OH, NO! THEY WELDED IT

& NOW IT LOOKS LIKE A GIANT BANANA*
* Splice welds and welding of gusset plates and other members shall require proper use of "strongbacks" and
other means to prevent distortion during welding. This is critical when welding will be concentrated in one
side or area of a member. WELD PASS SEQUENCE CANNOT BE OVERLOOKED IN THESE CASES.
See Section 5.23 for applications other than Columns & Trusses (Beams)
Page 9 of 12
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
WELDPost-Welding Visual Inspection (Plant Piping)

SAIC-W-2007
11-Dec-13
Joint preparation & cleanliness meets the detailed requirements of Section 5.15 below:
INSPECTION POINTS (VERIFY)

1. Observance of smoke with objectionable fumes may indicate welding is being done on fouled surfaces.
2. Joint Prep method, i.e., thermal cutting, gouging, and grinding results in a workmanlike profile & finish.
5.15.4.4 Gouge or Notch Limitation: Roughness exceeding these values & notches or gouges not more than 3/16
in. [5 mm] deep on other wise satisfactory surfaces shall be removed by machining or grinding. Notches or gouges
exceeding 3/16 in. [5 mm] deep may be repaired by grinding if the nominal cross-sectional area is not reduced by
more than 2%. Ground or machined surfaces shall be fared to the original surface with a slope not exceeding one in
ten. Cut surfaces & adjacent edges shall be left free of slag. In thermal-cut surfaces, occasional notches or gouges
may, with approval of the Engineer, be repaired by welding.
3. Any Mill Discontinuities are resolved per AWS D1.1, dispositioned & repaired as per Table 5.4 below.
POINT 1: Welding Joint preparation & cleanliness meets AWS D1.1 requirements ........... PASS or FAIL
Page 10 of 12
Welding Environment & Preheat is acceptable per requirements of Section 5.12 below:
INSPECTION POINTS TO WATCH

A quick look at this and you can see where the 8 Km / hour wind rule in SAES-W-011/012/etc comes from.
BIG POINT OF DIFFERENCE (OMISSION): NO MENTION IS MADE OF THE SMAW PROCESS.
SO ... WELDERS CAN WELD SMAW (AWS D1.1 APPLICATIONS ONLY) IN WINDS ABOVE 8 KM/Hr ... RIGHT?
ANSWER: AS LONG AS WELD QUALITY MEETS ATTACHMENT 2 FOR FILLET & GROOVE WELDS AND THE
WELDING PROCESS CONTROL PROCEDURE DOES NOT SPECIFY A MAXIMUM LIMIT FOR WIND SPEED.
REQUIREMENT: With SMAW, unshielded work shall not be subject to excessive* arc fluctuations.
* This varies from welder to welder depending on skill level in wind & how wide his butt is to keep wind off the work.
WINDBORNE DUST/SAND (ELEMENT OF HIGH WINDS) SHALL ALSO REQUIRE PROTECTIVE MEASURES.
5.6 Preheat and Interpass Temperatures
Base metal shall be preheated, if required, to temperature not less than minimum value listed on WPS (see 3.5 for
prequalified WPS limitations & Table 4.5 for qualified WPS essential variable limitations). For combinations of base
metals, the minimum preheat shall be based on the highest minimum preheat. This preheat and all subsequent
minimum interpass temperatures shall be maintained during the welding operation for a distance at least equal to the
thickness of thickest welded part but not less than 75 mm all directions from point of welding. Minimum interpass
temperature requirements shall considered equal to the preheat requirements, unless otherwise indicated on WPS.
PREHEAT & INTERPASS TEMPS SHALL BE CHECKED JUST PRIOR TO INITIATING ARC FOR EACH PASS.
THIS MEANS EACH WELDER KNOWS THE PREHEAT REQMTS & HAS THE CORRECT TEMP CRAYON (ETC)
POINT 2: Welding Environment & Preheat meets AWS D1.1 requirements ........... PASS or FAIL
Page 11 of 12
Welding Consumables (Section 5.3):
5.3.2 SMAW Electrodes. Electrodes for SMAW shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWS A5.1,
Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding, or to the requirements of AWS A5.5,
Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding.
NO SIGNIFICANT CHANGES EXIST FOR CONSUMABLE CONTROL & CONSUMABLES USED FOR PIPING
Utilize the applicable checklists for Consumable Control & an approved Procedure detailing controls.
POINT 3: Welding Consumables & Controls followed an approved procedure ........... PASS or FAIL
Welding Execution (Procedure):

Welding Activities shall follow an approved or pre-approved WPS that has been submitted to SA PID & approved
per the requirements of SAEP-352.
Where details of welding are unknown (unspecified), ENGINEER & QUALITY MANAGER shall make these KNOWN
This shall be done to provide adequate Field Instructions to Inspectors & Welders. Quality Mgr. Action.
NDT Specs (Section 6, Part C & See Repairs Below):

SECTION 6 Part C Acceptance Criteria (Visual & NDT)
6.7 Scope - Acceptance criteria for visual and NDT inspection of tubular connections and statically and cyclically
loaded nontubular connections are described in Part C. The extent of examination & acceptance criteria shall
be specified in the contract documents on information furnished to the bidder. Quality Mgr. Action!
Allowable Repairs (Summary)
Page 12 of 12
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Review Procedure - Weld ID & Traceability, Process Control
Tracking (S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2008
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
MH's SPENT
PASS
FAIL
General Requirements (S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database) ... Applies to Plant Piping. Pipelines, Tanks & Vessels
A1
Procedure Scope:
Production Welding, Welder Performance, Reporting, NDE Tracking,
Pressure Test Verification (Process Completion):
S-PM-G000-1520A) Contractor Data Mgmt & Tracking System (SAEP-1160 Database)
0006,
must be approved by COMPANY prior to start of work on Projects
Section 8.1
Exception: S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database Reqmt (See Item A2
below)
A2
SAEP-1160 Database EXCEPTION:

For limited scopes with fewer than 500 groove/butt welds:
Contractor may elect to use a hardcopy tracking system with the approval
of COMPANY. Reporting for these projects shall use applicable SATRs
such as:
S-PM-G000-1520A) Weekly Welder Repair Rate Report (SATR-W-2013).
0006,
B) Weekly Welder Repair Assessment & Tracer Welds Report (SATR-WSection 8.1
2018).
C) Weekly & Cumulative Weld Status Report (SATR-W-2019).
D) Weld Summary Report (SATR-W-2008) to document special process
control on a per weld basis through Pressure Testing
A3
Procedure Purpose (Goals):

S-PM-G000-1520Establishes requirements & responsibilities for tracking & reporting
0006,
production welds, welder performance, NDE and other special processes
Section 1
and pressure testing of completed systems associated with In-Kingdom
construction activities at COMPANY facilities.
A4
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database Data Availability:

Data tracking system(s) shall be maintained, kept current & available for
S-PM-G000-1520COMPANY review at all times. Data shall be available on daily basis for
0006,
both current & cumulative data. Data shall be retrievable by date for any
Section 8
given day from commencement of the work through project completion. At
the end of the project the archived records shall be submitted in
accordance with contract requirements.
A5
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database Data Reporting (S-PM-G000-15200006, Section 8):

Contractor shall track welding activities on a daily basis and submit to
COMPANY each week a weld tracking & welder performance report for
that week's work. Cut-off date for submitting weekly performance report
shall be agreed to by Contractor & COMPANY PQM.
Refer to Att. 1 (Section 8) for Details.
A6
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database Data Availability S-PM-G000-15200006 Sect. 8.3):

Welding Production Output for cumulative weld data and welder data
required by this document is to be reported weekly in the weld tracking &
welder performance report. Shop and field weld and welder data may be
included on the same report.
Refer to Att. 1 (Section 8.3) for Data & Reporting Details.
Page 1 of 9
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.3*
TRAVEL TIME
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2008
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Detailed Requirements (S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database) ... Quality Manager Checklist
B1
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database Minimum Data Requirements:

The following* minimum data items associated with full penetration
groove and butt welds and associated special processes for pressure
piping or field-erected pressure vessels and API storage tanks are
required to be collected, linked, and maintained for each weld to the
extent it is applicable. The acceptance or rejection of groove and butt
weld special processes shall be indicated as applicable. When UT is
used in lieu of RT the tracking and reporting requirements shall remain
the same. Contractor shall record and track production, inspection &
testing of socket and fillet welds in a separate database and submit to
Saudi Aramco on a weekly basis.
Attachment 1 lists Section 8 in it's entirety.
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database Key Elements are listed below
B2
Weld Identification Basic Information ... Attachment 1
B3
Weld Fit-up Inspection ... Attachment 1
B4
In-Process Weld Inspection ... Attachment 1
B5
Completed Weld Visual Inspection ... Attachment 1
B6
B7
B8
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
Weld Selection for NDT ... Attachment 1

A) Sequence of Process & NDT is critical. (NDT of PWHT welds for PNos 3, 4 & 5 materials prior to PWHT should be considered for
S-PM-G000-1520information only & not final acceptance. The intent is to evaluate the weld
0006,
quality prior to PWHT so any unacceptable discontinuities can
Section 8.1
be repaired prior to PWHT.
B) NDT Process Control Procedure is used (SAIC-NDT-2010 Series)
C) Design Information & Code Criteria ... Ex: Severe Cycle Service
S-PM-G000-1520Weld Selection for HT ... Attachment 1 (SAIC-W-2012)
0006,
Section 8.1
S-PM-G000-1520NDT Required ... Attachment 1
0006,
Section 8.1
B9
NDT Control and Identification ... Attachment 1

This number, once assigned to a weld, shall remain with weld until final
acceptance. Repeated NDT on a weld shall be indicated by adding or
modifying the NDT Report Number suffix similar to that used for weld
repair as stated below.
This is further detailed in NDT Process Control Procedure.
B10
Selection of Tracer Welds ... Attachment 1

A) Two tracer welds must be selected for each rejected weld in a 10% RT
system. The two welds must have been welded by the same welder using
S-PM-G000-1520the same welding process and use the NDT method as the initial weld for
0006,
evaluation.
Section 8
B) Progressive sampling of welds (tracer welds) shall follow the
progressive sampling method as stated in governing SAES. Tracer welds
are not to be counted in the 10% sampling process.
Page 2 of 9
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2008
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B11
Results of RT Film Evaluation by Saudi Aramco

A) Welds rejected for weld quality requiring repair have their original
weld id numbers modified by suffix & progression
(R1, R2, T1, T2, T1R1, T1R2, T2R1, T2R2, etc)
B) Welds rejected for film quality (error exists in S-PM-G000-15200006) require reshoot as follows:
W-01 (Reshoot) using lead letter ID
See also SAIC-RT-2010 Checklist
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
B12
Evaluation of other completed Special Processes

A) PMI Required ... Attachment 1
B) PWHT Required ... Attachment 1
C) Hardness Testing (HT) ... Attachment 1
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.1
B13
Retests for HT
A) If any reading exceeds the specified limit by no more than 10 BHN,
then a minimum of three (3) additional indentations shall be made near
the original high reading
B)
Indicate acceptance or rejection of the required 3 additional HT test on
the same weld. If all three (3) retests are below specified limits, then the
joint is acceptable. If any of the retest readings are found to exceed the
specified limits, then the weld shall be
considered unacceptable.
C) If any welds are found to be unacceptable, then two additional welds
from the same lot shall be tested. If more than one weld in a lot is found
to be unacceptable, then all welds in that lot are tested.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
PHYSICAL MARKING OF WELD ID NUMBERS BY SYSTEM (SEE ATTACHMENT 1, S-PM-G000-1520-0006, SECTION 8.2)
C1
Weld Identification Numbering System - The following weld

identification numbering system shall be used to identify and track piping S-PM-G000-15200006,
groove & butt welds as a minimum. Weld numbering shall be consecutive
Section 8.2
in the direction of flow per line. Each weld shall be identified by joint
number, line number, and spool number.
C2
In addition to the spool number & line number identification, each weld (W01) shall be identified as per Attachment 1, Section 6.2.
S-PM-G000-1520Suffixes shall be R1, R2, T1, T2, & RW (RW for "cut out" joint)
0006,
Section 8.2
Note 1: Tracers can have repairs (W-01T1R1, R2)
Note 2: Cut out joints can have repairs (W-01RWR1, R2)
C3
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
Welds fabricated in field shall be prefixed with letter "F"

Welds fabricated in approved weld shops with letter "S"
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.2
C4
Weld numbering id system for pressure vessels, tanks,and other pressure- S-PM-G000-1520retaining non-pipe welds shall be approved by the Insp Dept
0006,
Representative prior to the start of work.
Section 8.2.1
C5
Contractors/fabricators may propose alternative numbering systems for

approval by COMPANY. The identification system shall be used to
identify all examinations, surveys, inspections, etc.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.2.2
C6
All weld joints shall be marked for identification by weld number & welder
symbol. Identifications shall be made with a suitable weather-proof
marking material. Markings shall be placed in a location so they will be
easily observed & remain visible for a time suitable* to authorized SA
inspector.
* Until Coating system has been approved to cover up completed /
accepted* (Visual, NDT, Tested, etc) welds.
Note 1: Markings shall be compatible with subsequent coating or heatshrink sleeve applications.
Note 2: Markers shall be low chloride type for SS.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section 18.
S-PM-G000-15200010, Section 16,
SAES-W-012,
Section 15,
SAES-W-017,
Section 15,
WELD MODIFICATIONS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE SEE SAIC-W-2036, SAIC-W-2013 & SAIC-W-2015)
Page 3 of 9
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
D1
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2008
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Engineering Change Notice Procedure* covers such work.

SAIC-W-2036 is followed relative to Rework/Repairs
SAIC-W-2013 is followed relative to Repairs.
ID, Numbering, NDE & Special Processes are controlled.
Page 4 of 9
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

PROJECT TITLE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2008
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
REMARKS:
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
ATTACHMENTS: Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 DATABASE, PROCESS CONTROL TRACKING (By Weld)

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: 1. S-PM-G000-1520-0006, SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL AND WELD STATUS WITH
NDT TRACKING
2.
S-PM-G000-1520-0010, Welding Requirements for Pressure Vessels
3.
S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping
4.
SAES-W-012, Welding Requirements for Pipelines (31 December 2002)
5.
SAES-W-017, Welding Requirements for API Tanks (7 December 2005)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 5 of 9
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2008
11-Dec-13
WELDTracking (S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database)
Page 6 of 9
Page 7 of 9
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Review Procedure - Control of Welding Consumables
(Storage, Handling, Issuance, Conditioning) - Plant Piping
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2009
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
General Requirements (Quality Manager Action as Indicated)
A1
Personnel involved in handling, storage, conditioning, issuance & controls

for use of welding consumables are identified with detailed responsibilities
& are trained in the procedure as follows:
A) Material Controller (Receipt, Control, Storage, Handling, Issue, etc)
Special Process
B) Welding Foreman/Supervisor (Issue, Distribution, Control, Return)
(Welding)
C) QC Inspector (Monitors approved procedure and all activities)
D) Welders (Follows approved procedures and controls)
Note: Clearly detail all consumable control responsibilities, ensure
procedure is available & understood by all responsible for controls.
A2
Procedure has provided details on how welding consumables are controlled

by the following but not limited to:
A) Receipt & Storage requirements - prior to issuance
B) Material controller- Stock control (First in, First out) & issuance
Special Process
C) Requestor/User - Receiving of consumables (Daily Basis)
(Welding)
D) Return of un-used consumables, ID system & reconditioning
E) Disposal Authorization (Rejected Consumables, etc)
SAIC-W-2010, SAIC-W-2009 & SAIC-W-2032 are utilized in
development & revision of Procedures
A3
Procedure contains these relevant QC Report Forms (Records) for

documenting & monitoring control of welding consumables:
A) SATR-W-2009 - Rod Oven Calibration (Storage, Bake, Portable)
B) SATR-W-2010 - Welding Consumable Issuance Record
C) SATR-W-2020 - Recv Insp Detail Form & QC log (Consumables)
A4
Electrodes, filler wires, and fluxes shall conform to ASME SEC IIC.
Other consumables may be used only with the approval of COMPANY
A5
Procedure lists Instruments & Equipment that will be used for storing,
handling and conditioning of welding consumables. Humidity & temperature
S-PM-G000-1520control requires use of calibrated hygrometers, temp gauges, ovens and
0011,
cabinets for Dry Environment.
Condition of
Para. 8.2
existing electrodes shall be evaluated per the detailed requirements of
Manufacture .
A6
Quality Mgr. takes action on items in Attachment 1 for:

A) GTAW consumables & Proper Practices for the Field
B) Purging Consumables & Controls (as applicable to scope)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section 8
A7
GTAW filler metals (*including those cut or partially used) have either
the AWS/ASME identification or manufacturer's unique ID code marked on
each individual rod, by manufacturer, with flags, stencils or stamps. *This
has been a big problem on large projects
SAES-W-016
Para 3 & S-PMG000-1520-0011
Para. 8.3
A8
S-PM-G000-1520Procedure contains applicable elements (Notes, etc) S-PM-G000-15200011

Para
0011/SAES-W-011, Conditioning, Storage & Exposure of SMAW Electrode
8.2 &
as per Manufacture recommendation & SAW Consumables.
SAES-W-011,
See Attachment 2. Copy & paste in procedure as applicable.
Para. 6.2
Page 1 of 8
Special Process
(Welding)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.1
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
SYSTEM ID.
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

(Storage, Handling, Issuance, Conditioning) Plant Piping
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2009
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
SHIELDING GASES
B1
Shielding gases shall conform to the following requirements:

A) AWS A5.32 Specification for Welding Shielding Gases
1. Carbon dioxide (CO2): Federal Specification BC-C-101, Type B or
S-PM-G000-1520Compressed Gas Association CGA G-6.2, Type F.
0011
2. Argon (Ar): Compressed Gas Association CGA G-11.1, Grade A.
Para. 8.7
3. Use of other gases and gas mixtures shall require COMPANY
approval.
B) The requirements for other gases and gas mixtures shall be submitted
to COMPANY for approval.
SAW FLUX
C1
Submerged Arc Welding Fluxes

A) Active type Submerged Arc Welding fluxes shall not be used without
approval (obtained prior to welding procedure qualification)
B) Fabricator shall clearly identify the proposed use of active fluxes in
their welding procedure submissions.
C) Flux fused during welding is not reused (recrushed slag, etc)
D) SAW fluxes that the flux manufacturer recommends for single pass
welding shall not be used for multiple pass welding.
SMAW ELECTRODES
D1
All consumables shall be stored and dried, per the requirements

Manufacture.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.2
D2
F-Nos. 1 and F-Nos. 2 SMAW electrodes are prohibited on:

A) Mat'ls requiring impact* tests (Per Code or spec).
B) For Pressure-Retaining welds.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.6
D3
Maximum allowable SMAW electrode sizes that can be used are:

A) Low hydrogen: 5 mm = 1G/1F position; 4 mm = all other positions.
B) Non-low hydrogen electrodes: 5 mm = all positions.
Sizes larger than those listed are acceptable only if approved by
COMPANY and only if the PQR was performed using the electrode size
and positions to be used in production. The approval shall be obtained
through the welding procedure review process.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.5
SAES-W-011
Para. 11.1
Table 1 Conditioning, Storage, and Exposure of Low Hydrogen Electrodes to A5.1 (Notes 1, 2, 3, 4):
E1
Drying & Re-Drying: Prior to use all electrodes shall be dried & Redrying as per Manufacture recommendation.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.2
E2
Storage: After drying, the electrodes shall be stored as per Manufacture

recommendation.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.2
E3
Exposure: As per the Manufacture Recommendation.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.2
E4
Re-Conditioning: As per the Manufacture Recommendation.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.2
Page 2 of 8
QR NUMBER
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
E5
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2009
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
PASS
FAIL
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONSUMABLES (APPLICATIONS) ... See Note 2 & also SAIC-W-2010
F1
Welding consumables shall be selected based on their mechanical

properties, compatibility with mat'ls to be joined, their suitability for the
intended service, consideration of polarity, position, & direction of
welding. (Extreme Caution for older electrode lot usage)
Again, this cannot be emphasized enough to QA/QC Mgrs.
F2
Welding consumables which are being used outside of their rated tensile
S-PM-G000-1520or impact ranges listed in the manufacturing specs must be batch tested
0011
or have COMPANY approval. Batch testing must be per the ASME SEC II
Para. 8.4
C SFA 5.01 to verify they meet base material reqmts.
See Note 1
Check SAIC-W-2010, Section B & Attachment 4
F3
Low hydrogen* consumables, measured per AWS A4.3, are used.

*Verify consumables have less than or equal to 8 ml of hydrogen per 100
g of deposited weld metal, measured per AWS A4.3
F4
Root pass of single-sided groove welds without backing in P-No. 1 carbon S-PM-G000-1520steels may be made with an Exx10 electrode.
0011
Again, check electrode test values (rated values) closely.
Para. 8.4.1
F5
Procedure addresses Dissimilar Metal Welds (as defined):

A) Any weld joint (excluding weld overlays or strip lining) between
ferritic steel and either austenitic stainless steel, duplex stainless
steel, or nickel-based alloys, or
B) Use of SS or nickel-based filler metals on ferritic steels.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.4.2
F6
Filler metal or deposit chemistries conforming to A-number 2 (ASME

SEC IX), i.e., carbon-0.5% Mo, shall not be used for sour service
applications without PWHT unless specifically approved by COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.4.5
Control of Electrode Issuance and Return ... See Note 2
G1
QA/QC Mgrs are tasked with CPI in the Critical Area of Consumable
Control. Please ensure that procedure contains BEST PRACTICES.
Several are identified below & in Attachments & SATR-W-2010
Sch Q, CPI
Clause
G2
Procedure contains SATR-W-2010 - Welding Consumable Issuance

Record or an approved equivalent. Take Note of Improvements:
A) List of all Consumables to be used on the Project. (Important)
B) Issue & Expiry Times (Critical) & Atmospheric Exposure Time
C) Batch/Lot/Heat Numbers (Critical)
D) QC Comments Area (Allows Surveillance)
E) GTAW & Tungsten (SEE ATTACHMENT 1)
F) Stub End Returns Daily (Stub Buckets) Stop Poor Practices*.
G) Color-Code & Segregation of 1-Time Reconditioned SMAW rods
Sch Q, Att. IV
Table
(WELDING)
G3
A detailed list of checkpoints are added to this checklist after approval of

the procedure for control of electrode issuance, receiving & return is
approved. Add best practices.
Page 3 of 8
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.4.1
See Note 1
Sch Q, CPI
Clause
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
After any exposure > permitted time period, the electrodes must be Redried* as per Manufacture Recommendation. Wet or moist electrodes are
not used. Break/discard.
System exists S-PM-G000-15200011,
to ID any Re-dried electrodes (Coat the ends).
These
Para. 8.2
once re-dried electrodes may be reissued (once).
Redried electrodes returned unused are broken/discarded.
Inspectors know difference between reconditioned & redried
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.4
QR NUMBER
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

PROJECT TITLE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2009
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
CONSUMABLE CONTROL (RECEIVING INSPECTION & CONSUMABLE CERTIFICATION TEST REVIEW)
H1
PROCEDURE UTILIZES RESOURCES OF:

A) SAIC-W-2010 Receiving Insp of Welding Consumables
B) SATR-W-2020 Welding Consumable Receiving Insp Report
These resources are reviewed and used in the Procedure as they are
applicable to the workscope and this process. Be Prepared for
COMPANY Assessments that check records & details of consumables.
These documents may change the way you do Recv Inspection.
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Sch Q, Att. IV
Table
(WELDING)
REMARKS:
NOTES:
1) It isCOMPANY
the intention
of this
checklist
& Attachments
1 & 2 tocontain
address
problems
existing
in Consumable
control
today
on
IK Projects.
states
that
SAES-W-011
cannot possibly
allwidespread
of the quality
requirements
necessary
for Welding
Consumable
Controls COMPANYrecommends
as it is not the intention ofthat
theconsumables
Standard. COMPANY
was consulted
in preparation
of are
this needed"
checklistfor
& has
reviewedThe
its practice of using older,
content.
be purchased
in such quantities
"as they
IK Projects.
unused electrodes on projects is not prohibited, but shall be closely monitored with cautions taken for those points addressed
in Attachments 1 & 2.
To those Quality Programs who already practice these points, this has not gone unnoticed by COMPANY. Your proactive practices in
the area of consumable control are saving you cost and rework over time by closely following your consumable manufacturer and those
Best Welding Industry Practices. Where a consumable is used but not mentioned in this checklist, it is the intention that Standard Industry
Practice (AWS C5.5 for GTAW, etc) cover those points necessary to maintain quality consumables and their control on the job.
2) This checklist is to be used with SAIC-W-2010, SATR-W-2010, SATR-W-2020 & SAIC-W-2032 for PLANT PIPING
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - Consumable Control Procedural Elements (Tungsten Electrodes & GTAW Filler Metal, Purging Consumables & Control)
Attachment 2 - SAES-W-011 - Conditioning, Storage & Exposure of Consumables (SAW Att. 2)
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: 1. S-PM-G000-1520-0011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping,
2. ASME SEC IIC Welding Rods, Electrodes and Filler Metals, (Latest Edition)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 4 of 8
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2009
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Attachment 1 - Consumable Control (Procedural Elements)

TUNGSTEN ELECTRODES & GTAW FILLER METAL CONSUMABLES
Quality Step (COMPANY approved, Required for shop approval): Procedure & surveillance ensures proper shop & field practices:
1. Properly prepare new tungsten with diamond type cutting equipment specifically designed for Tungsten (Piranha, etc)
Many available & inexpensive tungsten cutters/grinders utilize diamond technology to provide clean, contamination free,
separation & grinding finish that stops splintering/shattering of tips, cross contamination, & gives precise tip geometry &
desired weld shape, size, penetration for consistency (Results are cost savings in time, repairs, extended electrode life).
2. QC surveillance shall monitor GTAW practices and Tungsten consumable control as follows on SA Projects (procedure)
A) Issue properly prepared Tungsten electrodes (Incl Consumable Control Procedure). Issue per SATR-W-2010.
B) Prohibited are: 1) Unacceptable practice of field grinding tungsten. 2) The improper methods of removing contaminated
or oxidized tungsten tips (breaking with wire cutters, breaking by hammer, or grinding off with silicon carbide wheel.
C) Early identification of welders using improper technique (retrain & monitor welders until they produce quality results).
D) Redressing of contaminated or oxidized tips is done at a specified location using proper tip geometry. (Procedure)
3. Filler metal contamination follows Filler Metal Addition Practices (In-Process GTAW Surveillance & Consumable Control)
FILLER METAL ADDITION (For manual GTAW, only cut length Filler Wire is covered. Wire feed or autogenous welding is not allowed)
A) Filler Metal Addition: When retracting weld filler rod from the pool, care shall be exercised to ensure the hot end of the rod is not
filler wire matches the filler material specified on the welding procedure.
B) Procedure assure cleanliness of filler material (no visible rust, discoloration, or atmospheric contamination such as dust or
residues. GTAW Filler metals shall be issued & stored in portable containers such as a capped PVC tubes (labelled with filler ID)
or other cost effective measures to assure minimum cleanliness and prevent atmospheric contamination.
Note: Similarly, issue Tungsten electrodes in small plastic bags or paper envelopes to assure cleanliness and prevent contamination.
Welder training assures that approved consumable id and storage procedures are followed in the field after issuance.
PURGING CONSUMABLES & CONTROLS (GTAW PRACTICES)
Purge Dams & Other Water-Soluble Consumables are listed in AWS D10.11, Recommended Practices for Root Pass Welding. Due to
a common problem of leakage with proprietary dissolvable water-soluble dams, these shall be avoided when possible. If purge dams are
to be used but cannot be retrieved after welding, then proprietary dissolvable (water soluble paper such as rice paper, etc) dams shall be
used and the following stringent conditions below for their application (Procedure shall detail these and other similar steps):
the joint to prevent their failure during the welding process, usually 300 mm on either side of the weld. (Procedure Point)
B) Before decreasing purge gas pressure and closing the weld joint, a visual inspection window shall be left open for Inspection to verify
acceptable root pass condition exists without any evidence of visible oxide tint or discoloration (Inspector shall verify that the consumable
dam is intact prior to closure of root pass. Procedure Hold Point!
Caution: Currently, tape is being used in many instances on large bore pipe to hold these dams in place. This is the only way the dams
stay in place. Dams using rice paper often allow a high rate of gas escape and require multiple layers glued together to maintain an
adequate purge. Many cone-shaped dams now used allow effective sealing and assurance that root pass oxidation will not occur.
C) When first using new materials, the effectiveness of the procedure & water soluble consumables shall be demonstrated. Mock-up!
Ensure ONLY water-soluble consumables (dams, tapes, glues) are used. Ensure Low-Chloride content below 50ppm
when consumables are used in Stainless systems. Data sheets shall be available and attest to material composition.
GTAW & GMAW Consumables for P-No. 1 Materials
GMAW Process shall utilize ER70S-2 & ER70S-3 Consumables. ER70S-6 is restricted* & not recommended** for use at SA.
CSD allows use of ER70S-2, 3 without requalification. *Reason: NACE RP0472 Table 2 restricts base material Composition as
follows: Carbon (C) 0.10 wt% max --- Manganese (Mn) 1.60 wt% max --- Silicon (Si) 1.00 wt% max ** Reason: Frequently,
Brinnell Hardness testing results are well above 200 BHN using this electrode (unfit for sour service) & PWHT is required.
Page 5 of 8
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2009
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Attach. 2 - SAES-W-011 - Conditioning, Storage & Exposure of Consumables (SAW Att. 2)
Page 6 of 8
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Receiving Inspection of Welding Consumables
SAIC-W-2010
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Procedure per SAIC-W-2009 is approved, Also Use Attachments 1, 2 & 3)
A1
Personnel in receiving inspection, handling, storage, conditioning,

issuance & controlled use of welding consumables are identified with
detailed responsibilities & trained in procedure use as follows:
A) Material Controller (Receipt, Control, Storage, Handling, Issue)
Note: Flow chart clearly details consumable control responsibility
(Available, posted, understood by all responsible for compliance)
Sch. Q,
Attachment IV,
Table 2.1
A2
Welding consumables are received & controlled per procedure:

B) Material controller- Stock control (First in, First out) & Issuance
Sch. Q,
Attachment IV,
Table 2.1
A3
The relevant QC Report Forms (Records) for documenting & monitoring

control of received welding consumables:
A) SATR-W-2020 - Recv Insp Detail Form & QC log (Consumables)
All electrodes stored are logged & evaluated (acceptance).
Sch. Q,
Attachment IV,
Table 2.1
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
EXISTING* ELECTRODES & SHELF LIFE (THOSE NOT LOGGED INTO COMPANY SYSTEM BY USE OF NEW SATR-W-2020
FORM):Note: Best Practice for Welding Process Control Procedures is to specify purchasing new electrodes specifically for projects and given
applications (especially those with specific or supplemental test requirements). Electrodes with the same designation are not necessarily alike.
Test Reports shall be carefully reviewed to ensure that consumables are not used outside their intended purpose.
B1
Consumable Controls exist (Acceptable to COMPANY) Attachment 1:

A) Program has been set in place to account for electrodes on site &
establish an effective "First In, First Out" Rotation of Stock. Electrodes
unidentified /untraceable (ASME Sec II C) are removed
B) Electrode Shelf Life Questions are resolved and acceptable practices
are in place. Mfg letters & test records are maintained.
C) Electrode cans found opened and stored improperly have been
declared unfit for use & removed from site to prevent inadvertent use on
COMPANY Projects. Check E6010 storage closely.
D) DRY ENVIRONMENT FOR ELECTRODE STORAGE
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.1
B2
Existing consumables are Reinspected, Test Reports reviewed &

checked per requirements of Attachment 4:
A) Segregate Electrodes by Quality (Test Reqmts) & Lot Number
Note: Electrodes with same designation can be unacceptable for given
applications if they do not meet minimum specified test reqmts.Reports
shall be carefully reviewed & checked against applications
B) Identify missing or unacceptable test report results before use.
C) Evaluate & test electrodes as necessary (COMPANY
recommends).Contact COMPANY regarding queries for supplemental
testing & use of electrodes outside given limits of ASME SEC II C &
Specs.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.1
B2
GTAW filler metal shall have either the AWS/ASME identification or

manufacturer's identification, marked on each individual rod by the
manufacturer with tags ("flags"), stencil, or stamping.
See GTAW consumable controls per Attachment 2.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.3
B3
Existing consumables were received & stored per S-PM-G000-15200011, SMAW electrodes as per Manufacture recommendation, and for
other Consumables See Attachment 3.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para
8.2 / SAES-W011,Para. 6.2
Page 1 of 15
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
NEW MATERIALS, CONSUMABLE SPECS ARE NEEDED TO CHECK TEST REPORTS/CERTS)
C1
Electrodes, filler wires, and fluxes shall conform to ASME SEC IIC.
Review Test Reports & Certificates & Log into SATR-W-2020
See Attachment 4 for Test Review & Receiving Insp Guidelines.
Electrode containers are affixed with the following identification:
a. AWS Specification* and,
b. Classification Designation
* Each AWS Specification shall meet procurement guidelines of ASME
Sec IIC, SFA 5.01 using COMPANY approved vendors.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.1
C2
Other welding consumables not listed in ASME SEC IIC shall require
approval from COMPANY. (Check a COMPANY approved WPS for
permission)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.1
C3
All consumables were received & stored per S-PM-G000-1520-0011,

SMAW electrodes as per Manufacture recommendation, and for other
Consumables See Attachment 3.
S-PM-G000-15200011 Para
8.2/SAES-W011,Para. 6.2
C4
GTAW filler metal shall have either the AWS/ASME identification or

manufacturer's identification, marked on each individual rod by the
manufacturer with tags ("flags"), stencil, or stamping.
Tungsten consumables (ASME SEC II C, SFA 5.12) are received,
controlled/issued.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.3
C5
Low Hydrogen SMAW electrodes are supplied in dried condition in

hermetically sealed metal cans with a positive* indication of seal integrity.
(*Corrosion, improper handling, damage can affect seals)
C6
SMAW electrodes: At least one imprint of the electrode designation

S-PM-G000-1520(classification plus any optional designators) are printed covering within 20011,
12 in. (65 mm) of the grip end of the electrode.
Para. 8.1
(ASME Sec IIC, SFA's for SMAW Electrodes)
C7
Following product information (as a minimum) are legibly marked on

outside of each unit package. (ASME Sec IIC, SFA 5.1, Par. 24.1)
(1) AWS specification and classification designations
(2) Suppliers name and trade designation
(3) Size and net weight
(4) Lot, control, or heat number
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 8.1
C8
SMAW ELECTRODE (LIMITATIONS):

A) F-Nos. 1 & 2 electrodes are not used on materials requiring impact
tests either by Code or job specification.
B) F-Nos. 1 & 2 electrodes are not used (pressure-retaining welds)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section
8.6
C9
Maximum allowable SMAW electrode sizes that can be used are:

a) Low hydrogen: 5 mm = 1G/1F position; 4 mm = all other positions.
b) Non-low hydrogen electrodes: 5 mm = all positions.
SAES-W-011,
Section 11.1
C10
For SAW, GTAW, GMAW, and FCAW electrodes and wires:

All electrodes and wires are stored in sealed containers, kept in a dry
environment. Any wires that have visible rusting or contamination are not
used and are discarded.
SAES-W-011,
Attach.2
C11
Electrodes that have become moist or wet are not used, and are
discarded.
SAES-W-011,
Attach.2
C12
SAW fluxes are stored in sealed containers and kept in a dry

environment. (NOTE: Damp flux are discarded.)
SAES-W-011,
Attach.2
C13
Opened SAW flux containers are stored continuously in ovens at 65C

minimum or at mfg's recommendation, whichever is greater.
C14
Active type SAW fluxes shall not be used without COMPANY approval.
C15
Flux fused during welding shall not be reused (i.e., fluxes that use
recrushed slag are not acceptable).
C16
SAW flux recommended by manufacturer for single pass welding shall

not be used for multiple pass welding.
C17
Non-Low Hydrogen Electrodes to A5.1 or A5.5 are received in a a dry

condition.
Page 2 of 15
SAES-W-011,
Attach.2
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.5.1
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.5.2
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para.
8.5.3
SAES-W-011,
Attach.-1
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
SAES-W-011,
Table 1
QR NUMBER
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-W-2010
PROJECT TITLE
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
C18
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
1. Carbon dioxide (CO2): Federal Specification BC-C-101, Type B or

Compressed Gas Association CGA G-6.2, Type F.
2. Argon (Ar): Compressed Gas Association CGA G-11.1, Grade A.
S-PM-G000-15203. Use of other gases and gas mixtures shall require COMPANY
0011,
Para.
approval.Inspector verifies affixed stickers, Legible Markings clearly ID all
8.7
products & existing bottles and valves are in good condition. Check test
certificate for purity, check dew point,moisture content, etc AWS A5.32
Consumable Classes are listed in Attachment 5.
REMARKS:
Attachments:
Attachment 1 - Consumable Control Practices Acceptable to Company
Attachment 3 - SAES-W-011 - Conditioning, Storage & Exposure of Consumables (SAW)
Attachment 4 - ASME SEC II C (SFA-5.01) FILLER METAL PROCUREMENT (RECEIVING INSPECTION) GUIDELINES
Attachment 5 - AWS A5.32 Specification for Welding Shielding Gases
1. SAES-W-011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping, (30 march 2005)
2. ASME Sec II, Part C Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals, (Latest Edition)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 3 of 15
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Attachment 1 - Consumable Control Practices Acceptable to Company

1. All Welding Consumables (electrodes*, filler wires, and fluxes) shall conform to ASME SEC IIC. (SAES-W-011, Para. 6.1) & shall meet an
applicable AWS specification & classification as packaged. Identification labelling shall clearly identify the product & Manufacturer certs (test reports)
shall attest to the correct AWS specification & classification. When "other" Non-ASME electrodes have been specified & are COMPANY approved
(through the WPS process), the same general controls shall apply. A Roster or Log shall be kept for each project(s) with documentation available for
Receiving (SATR-W-2020) and storage. Storage shall conform to the mfg detailed storage requirements as listed and available (attach to records with
Mfg Certs for all consumables). All welding consumables shall have manufacturer data sheets that show detailed storage requirements (temperature &
humidity limits at a minimum), or correspondence to provide adequate instruction in this regard. Shelf life shall be considered. Note: * Electrodes
shall include tungsten electrodes for GTAW process per AWS A5.12
Note: Welding Consumables shall have a SAP ID number to show their purchase from an approved vendor for specific consumable.
Best Practice for Vendor Uninspectable Welding Consumables is close receipt inspection & test report review, and by Inspection visit* to Vendor at
least once (COMPANY recommended). Currently, inspection visits are not required. Best Practice for electrodes* is their purchase specifically for
new projects in quantities based on Workscope using COMPANY-approved WPS as a basis for ordering consumables.
2. New consumables shall be received into Contractor's Quality system by recording pertinent information as listed on SATR-W-2020.
3. Existing consumables (shelf life) intended for use on Saudi Aramco Projects shall be evaluated for their quality and condition as follows & they
shall meet COMPANY, Welding Industry & Manufacturer recommended minimum quality requirements (with disposition) as follows: When meeting
applicable quality conditions, existing consumables shall be recorded into the Contractor's Quality System.
A) Electrodes without proper AWS Spec/Class labelling and/or traceability to manufacturer certs (records shall be kept for all consumables)
shall not be used on Saudi Aramco Projects and shall be removed from site to prevent their inadvertent use on Project work.
B) Electrodes older than 2* years shall not be used to make production welds on Saudi Aramco Projects. Electrodes shall be discarded or removed
from site to prevent their inadvertent use. Contractor shall assure electrode issue control follows a "First In, First Out" Rule.
*Note 1: Three (3) years shelf life is acceptable when demonstrated that mfg storage guidelines were met. (Temp/Humidity Controls)
*Note 2: When storage climate is questionable* (*Dry Environment = Air conditioned/dehumidified with calibrated hygrometer in use) electrodes
shall be limited to a shelf life of 2 years (max). See AWS Table for acceptable "storage before opening" limits.
*Note 3: Lincoln currently recommends a 3-year shelf life in certain brands of SMAW electrodes. When a manufacturer data sheet specifically states
detailed storage conditions (humidity & temperature) and a shelf life beyond three years, and storage requirements have been followed (as verified by
Quality), electrodes may be used for a period per manufacturer's instructions (to a three-year limit).
C) Electrodes found open and stored outside acceptable Manufacturer & Welding Industry recommended ranges shall be declared unfit for use
and removed from site to prevent their inadvertent use on Saudi Aramco Projects. Check E6010 storage closely.
Dry Environment Note: Air conditioned or climate controlled storage in cabinets within recommended temp ranges and relative humidity values
(verified by hygrometer) shall be demonstrated. In any disagreement, Electrode Mfg recommendations shall be made available and COMPANY shall
resolve all conflicts. Unacceptable is storage of Electrodes in open buildings subject to wide humidity ranges.
Typically, relative humidity can range from 5% to 100% in Saudi Arabia in open areas without climate controls
Note: The Table above applies to AWS A5.1 & AWS A5.5 and is intended for reference only relative to the COMPANY requirement for a DRY
ENVIRONMENT. SAES-W-011 Attachments 1 & 2 shall be affixed to procedures and followed.
4. STORAGE & HOLDING TEMPS AFTER OPENING: 1. Per Lincoln, Electrode cans shall never be placed in ovens as cardboard liners char &
electrode temps are not uniform. COMPANY concurs with this point. 2. Per Lincoln, store non low hydrogen electrodes (6010, 7010, etc) from freshly
opened containers in heated cabinets at 100 to 120 degrees F (40 50 degrees C). AWS table above suggests 75 to 125 F.
SAES-W-011 states Dry Environment. COMPANY concurs that AWS & Lincoln temp ranges & a 50-70% relative humidity (typical air
conditioned room) constitute a "dry environment" acceptable for storage of opened non low hydrogen electrodes. COMPANY also concurs
that opened non low hydrogen electrodes (6010, 7010, etc) shall never be stored above 130F or below 50%RH
Best Practice is to operate a small oven (Bench, cabinet or Portable type) set at 100 F to maintain these conditions.
Page 4 of 15
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
WELD-

Page 5 of 15
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
12/11/2013
QR NUMBER
WELD-
Page 6 of 15
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
ATT. 4 - ASME SEC II C (SFA-5.01) FILLER METAL PROCUREMENT (RECEIVING INSPECTION) GUIDELINES
FOLLOW STEPS 1, 2, 3 ABOVE ... First AWS Filler Metal Spec is Verified ... From the list Below
Page 9 of 15
FOLLOW STEPS 1, 2, 3 ABOVE ... Next (Step 2) ... Lot Classification (Section 5, SFA-5.01)
Page 10 of 15
FOLLOW STEPS 1, 2, 3 ... (Step 3) ... Level of Testing Schedule (Sect 6 & Table 1, SFA-5.01)
Page 11 of 15
Page 12 of 15
STEP 4 - GUIDELINES FOR SPEC REVIEW

OK ... You now know about the required Procurement Elements per ASME II C
1. ASME II C / AWS Material Specifications
2. Lot Classifications
3. Level of Testing Schedule
These elements have a direct impact on Consumable Quality. The old saying "You get what you pay for" truly
applies to consumables. When "defective" consumables are found, then the extent of the "lot" as related to the
lot classification becomes important. Knowing the elements & Testing required for Consumables is important.
Example Specification Review (Step 4)
Let us select ASME SFA 5.1 (Identical with AWS Specification A5.1/A5.1M:2004.)
Section 1 of will state the Scope & Spec - CS (SMAW)

Section 2 covers References (ASTM, etc)
Section 3 covers Classifications of Electrodes & Refers you to Tables (Example Below)
Section 4 is the Acceptance Clause ... Self-explanatory
Section 5 addresses Certifications ... This is one of the elements we seek.
Page 13 of 15
STEP 4 - GUIDELINES FOR SPEC REVIEW

Section 5 addresses Certifications ... This is one of the elements we seek.
After reading Annex A4, the importance of the Consumable Manufacturer's Quality Program becomes clear. It also
becomes clear WHY bad lots of consumables can "pop up at any time". Saudi Aramco has an approved Welding
Consummable Manufacturer's List for this exact reason. Verify consumable is from a SA approved Mfg. (ID #)
CSD recommends early & timely additional tests (composition, weldability, quality) on mat'ls received.
CONTRACTORS WHO DO NOT FOLLOW CSD ADVICE IN THIS MATTER ARE RISKING GREAT REWORK!
TEST CERTS (REVIEW)
1. Check P.O. against Test Certificates & WPS applications. Were all of the required Tests performed?
2. Missing Certs or consumables without specified Testing are cause for "HOLD" placed on Electrodes.
3. Ensure any existing electrodes to be used meet the req'd Application on a "LOT" basis BEFORE issue.
4. Don't wait until an audit finds welds were made with substandard electrodes (missing req'd tests, etc).
5. Electrodes of the same designation ARE NOT THE SAME.
6. Electrodes of the same designation with same specified Tests (Certs verifed) may be used in same applications.
Section 6 addresses Rounding Off Procedure ... Values are rounded to the nearest 1,000 psi (tensiles), etc
Section 7 addresses TESTS, PROCEDURES & REQUIREMENTS ... As shown below
TEST REPORTS SHALL BE CAREFULLY REVIEWED FOR EACH LOT USED FOR A GIVEN
WELDING SPECIFICATION (WPS) TO ASSURE CONSUMABLES MEET THE MIN. REQUIRED
QUALITY (TEST CERTIFICATES ON FILE) & HAVE PASSED THE REQUIRED TESTING BASED
ON THE ASME SEC II C SPECIFICATION REQMTS (SFA 5.1, 5.5, etc)
Page 14 of 15
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2010
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
Attachment 5 (AWS A5.32 Specification for Welding Shielding Gases)

Individual gas components are identified by the following codes:
A - Argon
C - Carbon Dioxide
He -Helium
H - Hydrogen
N - Nitrogen
O - Oxygen
Table 4 - AWS Classifications for Typical Gas Mixtures:
All cylinders and containers shall be marked in accordance with DOT regulations plus the following information, legibly
marked on, or attached to, each cylinder:
i) AWS specification and classification designation (year of issue may be excluded).
ii) Suppliers name and product trade designation (name of gas)
iii) Approved DOT warning label
The following example designates the minimum labeling requirement to comply with this specification:
Table A l - Additional Information From Compressed Gas Association (CGA):CGA-G4 Oxygen

CGA-G5 Hydrogen
CGA-G6 Carbon Dioxide
CGAG6.3 Carbon Dioxide Cvlinder Filling and Handling Procedures
CGA-P-9 The Inert Gases Argon, Nitrogen, and Helium
P- 1 Safety Handling of Compressed Gases in Containers
Page 15 of 15
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

Validation of Welding Equipment (Plant Piping)
SAIC-W-2011
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Welding power supplies shall be validated in accordance with BS EN

NOTE 50504 or an approved equivalent if impact toughness test is reqd by the
applicable company or industry specifications or codes.
A1
A2
A3
A4
S-PM-G000-1520Welding equipment is validated by an 'expert', using equipment which has

0011 ,
Para.
calibration traceable to national standards.
21.2
S-PM-G000-1520Verification of 'expert' is by observation of performance + certifications +
0011 ,
Para.
resume, or by approval of the Company. Refer BS EN 50504 Para. 7.
21.2
S-PM-G000-1520Measuring instruments are in good condition. Refer.BS EN 50504
0011 ,
Para.
Para. 9.3 (a)
21.2
Measuring instruments are calibrated by a recognized calibrator with
S-PM-G000-1520standards traceable to a national standard.Refer BS EN 50504
0011 ,
Para.
Para. 9.3 (b)
21.2
A6
Ambient temperature is measured to ensure it is within the limits specified S-PM-G000-1520for the power source, and the instrument rating been tested. Ambient
0011 ,
Para.
temperature is recorded.Refer BS EN 50504
Para. 9.5.1.1
21.2
A9
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Note : BS EN 50504:2008 ,This British Standard supersedes BS 7570:2000 which is withdrawn. It is technically identical to BS
7570:2000.
General
Requirements
Measuring instruments are 2 x (preferably 5 x ) more accurate than

the accuracy required for the validation grade. Refer.BS EN 50504 Para.
9.3 (c)
A8
PLANT NO.
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
A5
A7
SYSTEM ID.
QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
Input voltage is measured to ensure compliance with the specified value

S-PM-G000-1520for the power source. This measurement is recorded on the validation
0011 ,
Para.
certificate. Correct tappings have been connected within the power
21.2
source if relevant. Refer BS EN 50504 Para. 9.5.1.2
For engine driven power sources, check rated load speed and no-load
S-PM-G000-1520speed to ensure that the power source meets the rated values Refer BS
0011 ,
Para.
EN 50504 Para. 9.5.1.3
21.2
The resistive load across the output terminals of the power source, is
S-PM-G000-1520connected as far as practical. The instrumentation used for the validation
0011 ,
Para.
of the voltage across the resistive load & the transducer in the circuit, is
21.2
connected.Refer.BS EN 50504 Para. 9.5.1.4
A10
Power Source for each welding process are subjected to the following
loads, (BS 7570, Para. 9.4):
a. TIG - is loaded with a conventional load of drooping
characteristics{(U2 = (10 + 0,04 I2) V up to I2 = 600 A},
after which it remains constant at 34V.
b. SMAW- is loaded with a conventional load of Drooping
S-PM-G000-1520characteristic {U2 = (20 + 0,04 I2) V up to I2 = 600 A}, after
0011 ,
Para.
which U2 remains constant at 44 V.
21.2
c. MIG/MAG/FCAW/SAW - loaded with Flat characteristic
{U2 = (14 + 0,05 I2) V up to I2 = 600 A}, after which U2
remains constant at 44 V.
d. SAW - loaded with a conventional load U2 = (20 + 0,04 I2) V
up to I2 = 600 A, after which U2 remains constant at 44 V. Refer.BS
EN 50504 Para. 9.4
A11
S-PM-G000-1520The wire feed unit being validated, is connected to the source of power
supply normally used during welding.Refer BS EN 50504
Para. 0011 ,
Para.
9.5.1.5
21.2
Page 1 of 4
REV 3

SAIC-W-2011
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
A12
The wire feeder is assembled and adjusted according to the

manufacturer's instructions. Refer.BS EN 50504 Para. 9.5.1.6
A13
The wire feeder shall not be driven at speeds or loaded with filler wire
diameters, in excess of that shown on the rating plate. Refer.BS EN
50504.Para. 9.5.1.7
A14
The current rating of validation welding cables used > 2 x maximum

current flowing in the welding circuits. NOTE: Exception is where the
welding system is being validated with specific welding cable, or circuit
assemble characteristics.Refer.BS EN 50504.Para. 9.5.1.9
A15
The validation/calibration range of the control or meter fitted to the power

source, is selected from one of the following:
a) the full range of the control or meter;
S-PM-G000-1520b) a partial range of the control or meter;
0011 ,
Para.
c) selected points over the range of the control or meter.
21.2
Either b) or c) is agreed on BEFORE performing validation/calibration
Refer.BS EN 50504.Para. 9.5.1.9
A16
Measurements are taken at the minimum setting, the maximum setting,

and 3 other points nominally equally spaced between minimum and
maximum, over the full or partial range. Refer.BS EN 50504.Para.
9.5.1.10
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
Validation (Calibration) Process ... Company is allowed to witness (Issue RFI)
B1
The equipment is switched on 5 minutes before any calibration

requirements. Refer.BS EN 50504.Para. 9.5.2.1
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
B2
Validation starts at the minimum output setting. The power source output
is energized and stabilized for 10 seconds, and a reading is taken. The
procedure is repeated for each of the measurement points up to the
maximum, BS EN 50504 .Para. 9.5.2.2
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
B3
After a further 10 seconds a second reading is taken at the max. setting.

This procedure is repeated for each of the measurement points down to
the minimum,BS EN 50504 .Para. 9.5.2.3
B4
The power source is loaded in excess of that shown on the rating plate,
BS EN 50504.Para. 9.5.2.4
B5
If validation at a particular current and or voltage is required, but the

nature of the load does not permit that current or voltage at the
corresponding load voltage or current to be achieved, points are taken
above and below the desired values, and the required value calculated,
BS EN 50504 .Para. 9.5.2.5
B6
At each validation point selected point, record on to SATR-W-2011:

a) Current and/or voltage control setting
b) Power source meter readings.
c) Two values of the true measurement of current and/or voltage from the S-PM-G000-1520test instrumentation.
0011 ,
Para.
d) The mean value of the two measurements.
21.2
Results of measurements are systematically recorded and supplied
on, or with validation certificate. (SATR-W-2011). Refer BS EN 50504
.Para. 9.5.2.6
B7
If the power source has a slope control, the setting is noted. If it is

necessary to validate the power source at different settings of the slope
control, this is agreed prior to the validation.Refer.BS EN 50504. Para.
9.5.2.7
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
B8
A consistency test is carried out on controls which cannot be calibrated /

validated as they are not graduated in absolute units, or the original
validation is not applicable due to the way the equipment is being used,
e.g. under abnormal load conditions. Refer. BS EN 50504-Section 5
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
B9
On completion of a validation the results are compared with the Accuracy S-PM-G000-1520set in Table 1 of BS 7570. See Attachment 1. Refer.BS EN 50504.Para. 0011 ,
Para.
9.5.2.8
21.2
Page 2 of 4
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
11-Dec-13
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REV 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SAIC-W-2011
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B10
Equipment that meets the accuracy in Attachment 1 (Table 1) are

labeled with the following information:
A) "PASSED"
S-PM-G000-1520B) Date the label is valid (Date of Passed);
0011 ,
Para.
C) Date of expiry of the validation (6 mos per schedule Q)
21.2
D) Name of the authority issuing the label
E) Make, model and serial number of the equipment (Unique ID #) Refer.
BS EN 50504 .Para. 10.1.2
B11
For Equipment that does not meet accuracy recommended in

Attachment 1 (Table 1), label bearing the following information is
attached, OR, equipment is to be taken off project site:
a) "FAILED"
b) Date the label was issued;
c) Name of the authority issuing the label;
d) Make, model and serial number of the equipment.
All equipment in shops or in the field shall have a label . A tag for
rejected equipment with a reason for rejection is an acceptable
identifier (needs repair, etc). See SAIC-L-2031. Refer.BS EN 50504
.Para. 10.1.3
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
S-PM-G000-15200011 ,
Para.
21.2
REMARKS:
ATTACHMENTS:
Attachment 1 - BS EN 50504-2008 Table 1 (Validation/Calibration Tolerances)
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: Attachment 1 - BS EN 50504-2008 Table 1 (Validation/Calibration Tolerances)
2. BS EN 50504-2008, Code of practice for Validation of arc welding equipment
ATTACHMENT:
1. BS EN 50504-2008, Table 1 - Validation accuracies for standard grade power sources.
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 3 of 4
N = NO F = FAILED
REV 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2011
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
Attachment 1 - BS EN 50504-2008- Table 1 (Validation/Calibration Tolerances)
Page 4 of 4
WELD-
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Review Hardness Testing Procedure - All Applications
(Plant Piping, Pipelines, Vessels & Tanks)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2012
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
GENERAL PROCEDURE REQUIREMENTS (SPECIAL PROCESS CONTROL PROCEDURE PER CONTRACT SCH Q & S-PM-G000-15200006) Note: Applies to Plant Piping (S-PM-G000-1520-0011, W-016), Pipelines (W-012), Vessels (S-PM-G000-1520-0010, W-014) Tanks (W017)
A1
Production Hardness Testing Info (Weld reporting/tracking) shall be

gathered, correlated, linked, reported, stored in an e-format (Excel,
Access, PDF or similar). Data Management & Tracking System
(Database) must be COMPANY approved prior to start of work.
A2
Database for Welding (& Hardness Testing) covers two types of welds for
either pressure piping (Plant, Pipelines) or field-erected pressure vessels
S-PM-G000-1520and API storage tanks:
0006,
A) Full penetration groove & butt weld hardness tests are tracked
Para. 8.1
B) Socket & Fillet welds (Includes "other" weld or components specified
for Hardness Testing). These elements shall be tracked.
Note: Reporting follows applicable Welding Database reqmts
A3
Procedure details criteria for weld identification & weld selection of those
welds to be Hardness Tested & responsibilities (per design):
A) HT Random Sampling reqmts for specific production welds.
B) HT of PWHT welds (both Service and thickness considerations)
Design information must reflect actual data and changes can occur
during evolution of the project.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Para. 8.1,
See also Sect. C
of this checklist
A4
Procedure addresses precautions & responsibilities to verify the physical

Identification of materials, parts & components, including partially
fabricated assemblies by approved use of tags, stamps, color coding,
stencils, labels or permanent marking. (Co-ordination)
Note: Welds & items for Hardness Test shall have a unique ID clearly
visible to hardness test personnel & QC documenting test results.
System shall prevent errors in testing & documentation.
Sch. Q,
Attachment IV,
Para. 3.2
& S-PM-G0001520-0006,
Para. 8.1
A5
B1
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Para. 8.1
Procedure references this Checklist, all applicable references contained

Sch. Q,
within this checklist, and is identified/traceable to current Project
Attachment IV,
Document Control Procedure & Matrix (Project Quality Plan)
Table 2.1
SPECIFIC TECHNIQUE REQUIREMENTS (NACE RP0472, App. A 12-Step Mandatory Guidelines including Equipment)
Note: References are S-PM-G000-1520-0010 (Para 15.1), S-PM-G000-1520-0011, (Para 16.1), SAES-W-012, (Para 13.2) & SAES-W-017,
(Para 13.1)
Procedure addresses: Step by step method for hardness testing using
Portable TeleBrinell Hardness Tester (NACE RP0472, App. A)
NACE RP0472,
Verify Performance step by step per Attachment 2
Appendix A
Note 1: Procedure is available & personnel are trained in its use.
Note 2: Applicable project specs reflect this: NACE HT Exemption based
on welding processes in RP0472 are not applied at SA.
B2
Procedure specifies primary equipment for hardness test.

Portable Telebrinell Hardness Tester (Method) is mandatory for full
penetration groove and butt welds accessible by equipment.
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A
B3
Procedure specifies alternative equipment for performing HT where

weld geometry (fillet welds, small branch connections, etc) prevents the
use of the Portable Telebrinell method.
See Att 2 Notes (Alternative Equip). One of these two COMPANY
approved methods (MIC-10, Minibrinell) is to be selected.
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.4
Page 1 of 9
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B4
Procedure details Reference Bar requirements (Mat'l, range of

hardness, similarity to tested materials). See Attachment 2 Notes
relative to Reference Bar requirements for all project work
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
(*SAEP-355)
B5
Procedure cautions: EXTREME CARE shall be taken when grinding

welds flat (Flat-topping) to prevent / minimize base metal removal. Where
base metal removal is deemed excessive by Inspection, additional NDE
(UT, caliper, gauge, etc) shall be performed to verify no minimum wall
violation exists per applicable material specification
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Step # 1
B6
Procedure cautions: Testing with a 1.4 to 2.3-kg (3-5 lb) hammer for
Telebrinell Portable Hardness Testers (BHT) is required. Hammer head
weights shall be visually verified "as stamped" at 3-5 lb, this to assure
reliable results. Caution: Other hammer weights do not provide reliable
results and are prohibited. Any Test performed with incorrect weight
hammer is invalid and must be retested.
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Step # 4
B7
Procedure covers: Test bars shall be saved for test verification by QC &
SA Inspection. Visual verification of test bars & Production welds shall be
performed to verify proper BHT technique is used. Double impressions
and use of more than 2 adjacent sides is not allowed. Technicians make
indentations within .1mm roundness tolerance & follow the 12-step
procedure or they receive retraining, practice & supervision. Reduce
retests & Hold / Witness Points
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Steps #
4, 5, 7, 11
B8
Procedure covers: System for identifying rejected readings (Retest) on

Test bars & Production welds. Indentations found out-of-round, double
impressions, out of 3-4 mm range, etc, requires retesting. Using a
Permanent marker (Sharpy pen, etc), apply an "X" over the invalid
indentation(s) for retest. Welds unmarked with unacceptable indentations
on Production welds shall be investigated and retested to extent
necessary to ensure valid Brinell Hardness test results.
Identify invalid test results & ensure Quality of HT results
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Steps #
4, 5, 7, 11
B9
Procedure states: Weld deposits shall be hardness tested on the side

contacted by the process whenever possible. If access to
the process side is impractical, such as on piping or small diameter
vessels, hardness testing shall be done on the opposite side.
Sample accessible internal welds "randomly" & safely.
NACE RP0472,
Para 2.2.3
B10
Procedure covers sequence of BHT in relation to welding & PWHT. BHT

shall not be performed until AFTER welds are sufficiently cool and an
adequate time period has elapsed to ensure valid HT results.
Follow WPS special requirements for PWHT & BHT as listed, esp. where
potential for delayed Hydrogen cracking exists.
Sch. Q, Att IV,

Table 2.1 &
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.2
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
HARDNESS TESTING (HT) APPLICATIONS

Note
1: Checklist Application covers Plant Piping, Pipelines, Vessels & Tanks as referenced. Use as "applicable to workscope".
Note 2: PWHT for Service at COMPANY includes: Caustic, MEA, DGA, ADIP, Boiler Deaerator, Hydrogen, DEA, etc. Review Specs carefully!
C1
COMPANY shall specify any PWHT & Production Weld HT (rare at

COMPANY), including sampling extent & test criteria. Procedure reflects
this requirement. Note: When COMPANY specifies HT, follow applicable
equipment requirements & sampling practices within the checklist.
PIPELINES
SAES-W-012,
Para 13.1
C2
P- No 1 Sour Service Production Weld HT Sampling is detailed.

Sour Service Line Classes are sampled at 10% minimum rate:
A) All welders making such welds are monitored by sampling.
B) All weld categories are sampled (groove, butt, fillet, other).
C) All weld repairs "as marked" are sampled.
D) Readings shall be taken at weld center & in the HAZ as close to weld
edge as possible after flat-topping welds.
Note: Review Line Class Summary & specifications for any errors.
*SA does not specify testing at the NACE suggested 5% rate.
PLANT PIPING
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.7,
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Para. 8.1,
S-PM-G000-15200011, Section 16
Page 2 of 9
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C3
P-No 1 & Low-Alloy Production Welds subject to Code PWHT shall

have detailed requirements listed in Hardness Test procedure.
Production Welds PWHT'd for any reason (Service, Thickness, Code,
NACE or SAES-A-301, COMPANY, etc) receive HT as specified:
A) PWHT Furnace Batch method = 10% Hardness Testing
B) Localized PWHT method = 100% Hardness Testing
C) SA specifies: HT criteria = 200 BHN max - ALL P-No 1 weld
D) Hardness Testing applies to groove, butt, fillet, other welds, etc
E) Test in weld center & in HAZ as close as possible to weld edge.
F) Low-Alloy & Dissimilar Weld HT criteria (See Item C9)
Note: If it gets heat treated for COMPANY , it gets Hardness Tested
to verify satisfactory PWHT as intended by the code.
PLANT PIPING
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para 16.2
&
Para. 16.3 &
ASME B31.3
Para 331.1.7
Attachment 1
C4
P-No 10 " H " Production Welds (DUPLEX SS) shall have specific
detailed requirements listed in Hardness Test procedure as follows:
A) Production Welds are randomly sampled at a 20% rate*.
B) Utilize Telebrinell or COMPANY approved method
C) Reference Bar shall be within +/- 10% of specified Hardness
D) Maximum Hardness = 285 BHN (Non-sour Service), 270 BHN (Sour
Service) or lower specified value per SAES-A-301, Sect. 5.9
Note: Review Piping Line Class Tables & SAES-A-301. Verify the
correct application of this critical process requirement.
PLANT PIPING
S-PM-G000-15200011, Section 12,
Para 16.2 & 16.3
*SAES-W-016,
Para. 7.2
ASME B31.3
Para 331.1.7
Attachment 1
C5
Procedure covers PRESSURE VESSEL HT extent:

A) Production welds (groove, butt, socket, fillet, etc) subjected to PWHT
(due to Service) test as per Checklist Item C6, C7 below.
B) Sour Service Production welds (groove, butt, fillet,) for all matls.
PRESSURE
"Internal" attachment welds shall be tested when they contact the product
VESSELS
unless specifically exempted from HT by COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-1520C) Vessels of P-No 4 or 5 Material
0010, Para 15.1
D) SA specifies: HT criteria = 200 BHN max - ALL P-No 1 weld
E) Low-Alloy Weld HT criteria (Checklist Item C8)
Note: Test on process side of all welds (Checklist C6 & C7).
"External" attachment welds are exempt from testing.
C6
Procedure covers API TANKS HT extent:

(due to Service), test per Checklist Items C6, C7 below
D) SA specifies: HT criteria = 200 BHN max - ALL P-No 1 weld
E) Low-Alloy Weld HT criteria (if applicable, See Checklist Item C8)
Note: Test on internal side of all welds (Checklist C6 & C7).
API TANKS
SAES-W-017,
Para 13.1
C7
Procedure states: Vessel or tank butt welds, a minimum of one location

per weld seam shall be HT'd. One HT shall be made each 3 m (10 ft) of
weld seam. In addition, one hardness test shall be made on each nozzle
flange-to-neck and nozzle neck-to-shell/head weld.
Note 1: Each weld procedure used shall be hardness tested.
Note 2: Each weld is tested at or near middle of weld bead.
VESSELS &
API TANKS
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.5
C8
Procedure states: Vessel or tank fillet welds, a minimum of one location

per each attachment shall be HT'd. In addition, One HT shall be made for
each 3 m (10 ft) of total attachment fillet weld length.
Note 3: Tray attachment welds & others with disproportionate thickness
receive additional HT in the HAZ*.
* See Special Precautions (Heat Sinks) in Remarks Section
VESSELS &
API TANKS
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.6,
Para 4.5
Page 3 of 9
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
CONTRACT NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C9
Procedure Lists HT Acceptance Criteria (Alloy steel @ P-No) per

ASME B&PV Code Sect IX. P-Nos meet maximum HBW values :
A) 225 for P-3, P-4, P-10 (A, B, C, F), P-11
B) 235 for P-5A, P-5B (exception in C below), P-5C, P-6, P-7
Note: P-5C is listed at 241 in ASME B31.3 Heat Treatment Table
C) 248 for P-5B for 9Cr-1Mo-V grades (F91, P91, T91, WP91, Gr 9, and
C12A)
Note 1: HBW = Brinell Hardness Value taken @ weld
Note 2: SAES-A-301 supercedes ASME PWHT Table HT values for Item
"B" above (235 HBW). Attachment 1 lists a 241 value.
D) All dissimilar welds are HT'd (weld & HAZ) Attachment 1
Note: Code reqmt (PWHT or not, per ASME B31.3, Para. 331.1.7b)
PLANT PIPING,
VESSELS &
API TANKS
SAES-A-301*,
Para. 5.2.2 &
Table 6
(*ISO 15156)
EVALUATE TEST RESULTS & PROVIDE DISPOSITION OF UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS (Use SATR-W-012)
(Para 13.1)
D1
Procedure states: If any reading exceeds specified limits by no more

than 10 BHN, a minimum of (3) additional indentations shall be made
near the original high reading. If all (3) retests are below the specified
limits, then the joint is acceptable. If any retest readings exceed specified
limits, the weld shall be considered unacceptable.
D2
Procedure states: If any welds are found to be unacceptable, then two

additional welds from the same lot* shall be tested. If more than one weld
in a lot is found unacceptable, then all welds in that lot shall be tested.
PLANT PIPING
(Plant Piping, Pipelines as applicable).
S-PM-G000-1520Note 1: Applies to Sour Service welds (10% sample) & P-No 10H or
0011,
Duplex SS welds (20% sample). Additional welds selected shall be from
Para. 16.5
same welder, and selection of welds shall sample work from all welders.
Note 2: For Furnace "Batch" welds PWHT & HT'd 10%, ANY result
unacceptable shall be cause for entire "batch" to be tested.
D3
Procedure defines/distinguishes "Lot" relative to progressive

sampling or testing (For Welds, Consumables, Fittings) :
A)
Welds - Lot shall be defined as all of the same kind* of welds made since
the last acceptable weld, for a given welder from any previous production
on specific line class. Progressive exams shall be limited to specific
PLANT PIPING
welder with unacceptable HT results.
Note: S-PM-G000-1520The "same kind" of weld is: Same process or combination, same joint
0011,
type (groove vs. fillet), & same P-No. (Diameters & wall thicknesses may
Para. 19.1.9
02-SAMSS-011,
vary for "same kind" of weld).
B)
Para 4.1.2
Consumables - Lot is the same type consummable & heat or Control
number "as marked" on manufacturer packaging & certs.
C) Fittings - Lot is all items of same type & maximum thickness which
are produced from same heat of steel & subjected to same heat
treatment, or finishing, etc. (02-SAMSS-011, Para. 4.1.2)
D4
Procedure details Additional HT strategies as related to the following

three items (See Checklist Items D5, D6, D7 respectively) :
A) Proactive Quality Measures for HT on receipt (CPI)
B) Investigation Practice for unacceptable HT (Weld, HAZ)
C) Completion of partially fabricated assemblies subject to PWHT &
HT (Vessel components, Boiler & Heater tubes, coils, etc)
Page 4 of 9
See Note
PLANT PIPING,
PIPELINES,
VESSELS &
API TANKS
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 16.5,
Sch. Q, Att IV,
Table 2.1
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
D5
Proactive Quality Measures for HT (CPI) include:

A) Random HT checks on fittings "by lot" on receipt. Increase OOK HT
surveillance. Fittings & Lots with high HT values are identified for
Remedial* action (Increased Pre-Heat temp, PWHT). *See Item D8.
B) Welding Consumables* (by lot) as received on projects shall have
sample hardness tests taken as early in projects as possible using
approved WPS to assure quality & prevent rework. Timely QC monitoring
is essential to prevent consumable problems.
*Take BHT readings & PMI together per SAES-A-206, Section 7.7
Same as above,
& SAES-A-206,
Section 7.7
D6
Investigation Practice (Unacceptable HT results HAZ, Weld):

A) Fittings (Flanges, Wrought Ells, tees, etc) per 02-SAMSS-005/11 can
arrive IK "out of spec" with unacceptable hardnesses, despite OOK
quality efforts to obtain acceptable* values (*See Item D8).
B) When HAZ unacceptable readings are found, investigate fittings first,
then weld consumables next. Take two readings on fittings in question
(180 degrees apart) to verify the LOT (fittings same heat) meets specified
hardness limits. If unacceptable material hardness is found, take
additional readings (as agreed upon, per procedure) within the same LOT
& take appropriate Vendor action on Projects.
C)
Unacceptable weld values require investigation of consumable lots, WPS
values, & welders making such welds, especially when adjacent piping &
fittings are within specified limits. See Item D5
Same as above
D7
Partial fabricated assemblies subject to completion on projects, PWHT

& HT (Vessel components, Boiler & Heater tubes, coils, etc) :
A) OOK work shall be sampled to extent necessary based on
Receiving Insp Observation (minimum = random HT).
Note: In 2002, RT Refinery Project BI-3503 (Unit J-64) received over
3,000 heater tubes (coils) for final assy & testing. No visible indentations
were noted & data dossier with reports showed 100% acceptance of
Hardness Testing. Random sampling revealed HT values between 350 &
400, indicative of a lack of required PWHT.
B) Inspect incoming matl BHT indentations (Visible, round)
Retest any missing, unacceptable or suspect indentations
Same as above
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS: Procedure shall contain the elements listed in the checklist above as a minimum: Originator & Reviewer verify conformance of written
procedure with reqmts specified in "Reference" column of this checklist. Procedure cannot be combined with PWHT procedure. Review all Project
Specs (Lines Classes, Design Sheets) & verify spec accuracy relevant to these HT requirements.
Special Precaution (Heat Sinks): Welds with great base metal disproportion often have low heat input & large sections act as significant heat sinks
that result in high cooling rates. Tray support rings in Pressure Vessels are one such example (NACE RP0472, Para 4.5). Tray Support Rings & Other
similar type welds having great disproportionate base metal thicknesses shall be tested in the HAZ as well as center of weld. This includes ANY similar
welds. HAZ HT testing shall verify proper pre-heat & NACE recommended control measures were taken during fabrication (Include in HT Procedure).
Test such welds at or near weld center & at HAZ as close as possible to weld. (MIC-10)
Page 5 of 9
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
ITEM
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
FAIL
N/A
No.
ATTACHMENTS: Attachment 1 - ASME B31.3 (Table 331.1.1, Requirements for Heat Treatment)
Attachment 2 - NACE RP0472, Appendix A (Suggested Guidelines (12-Steps) for Portable Brinell Hardness Testing (BHT) of Welds)
RE-INSP DATE
1. NACE RP0472 (2005 Edition) Methods & Controls to Prevent In-Serv Cracking of CS Welds in P-1 Mat'l in Corr. Petroleum Refining Environ.
2. SAES-A-301 (30 March 2005) Materials Resistant to Sulfide Stress Corrosion Cracking Now ISO15156
3. S-PM-G000-1520-0010 Welding Requirements for Pressure Vessels
4. S-PM-G000-1520-0011 Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping
5. SAES-W-012 (31 December 2002) Welding Requirements for Pipelines
7. SAES-W-014 (29 June 2005) Weld Overlays and Welding of Clad Materials
8. SAES-W-016 (30 March 2005) Welding of Special Corrosion-Resistant Materials
9. SAES-W-017 (7 December 2005) Welding Requirements for API Tanks
10. ASME B31.3 (2004 Edition) PROCESS PIPING
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 6 of 9
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1
ASME B31.3 Section 331.1.7 Hardness Tests (Mandatory). Hardness tests of production welds and of hot bent and hot formed piping are intended
to verify satisfactory heat treatment. The hardness limit applies to the weld & the heat affected zone (HAZ) tested as close as practicable to the edge of
the weld. (a) Where a hardness limit is specified in Table 331.1.1, at least 10% of welds, hot bends, and hot formed components in each furnace heat
treated batch and 100% of those locally heat treated shall be tested. (b) When dissimilar metals are joined by welding, hardness limits specified for the
base and welding materials in Table 331.1.1 shall be met for each material.
Page 7 of 9
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2012
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 2 - NACE RP0472, Appendix A

(12-Steps) for Portable Brinell Hardness Testing (BHT) of Welds
1. Grind hardness test area flush with base metal. A smooth, relatively flat surface improves accuracy of hardness readings. One method to achieve
this is finish grinding with an 80 or finer grit sandpaper disc. Do not take hardness readings on scaled or discolored areas.
2. Insert the hardness test bar into the holder with the spacing button in the extreme forward position.
3. Ensure that the hardness test block is flat on the test surface.
4. Make the impressions by striking the anvil nut squarely with a 1.4- to 2.3-kg (3.0- to 5.0-lb) hammer. Pull the hammer away so it does not rebound or
restrike the anvil. Note (Technique): Training/practice is needed for consistency in BHT. Technique is checked by indentation roundness (Step 5).
Tolerance for roundness is 0.1mm. If the indentation does not appear to be perfectly round to the human eye, it almost always is not within specified
tolerances & retest is required. Use eyepiece to verify suspected out of round impressions visually spotted.
5. Measure the impression on weld hardness test site by placing the microscope so that the impression is approximately in the center of the scale.
Adjust eyepiece so the scale and the top of the impression are in sharp focus. Measure the diameter of the impression to nearest half division (0.050
mm [0.002 in.]); it should be between 3.0 to 4.0 mm (0.12 to 0.16 in.) (if not, discard the hardness test and redo it). Rotate eyepiece 90 degrees and
obtain a second diameter reading. If the two diameter readings vary by more than 0.100 mm (0.004 in.) (i.e., the impression is oblong), discard the
hardness test & redo it. If acceptable, average the two diameter readings for a recorded result.
6. Repeat the procedure in Step 5 to measure the impression on the hardness test bar.
7. To do subsequent hardness testing, move the spacing button one notch toward the rear. This ensures that impressions on the hardness test bar are
properly spaced and avoids double impressions. Continue this practice for succeeding impressions until one-half of one side of the bar is covered with
impressions. Then remove and reverse the bar, and again move the spacing button to the extreme front position.
8. Determine the Brinell hardness number by using the slide calculator supplied by the manufacturer
9. Subtract the determined weld hardness from the test bar hardness. The difference should be -10 to +50; if not, discard the hardness reading and do
a retest with a new hardness test bar. The new hardness test bar should have a hardness closer to the weld hardness to improve the hardness reading
accuracy. (Note: See Reference Bar Requirements below)
10. All hardness impressions at one test location should have at least 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) between their nearest edges.
11. Hardness impressions can be made on only two adjacent sides of the hardness test bars.
12. Replace indenter ball when it is out-of-round. (Inspect & rotate ball regularly, disassemble to rotate & inspect for flat spots)
REFERENCE (TEST) BAR REQUIREMENTS (Step # 9 of Procedure)

Note: Brinell Hardness Testing (BHT) is a self-calibrating method based on hardness impression comparison. Reference bars are M&TE, simply
Calibration standards of "Known" Material Composition & Hardness Values. (SAEP-355, Sect 6)
BHT Reference (Test) Bars are M&TE and shall:
1. Be from a Certified source (QC Record, CMTRs) to attest to their quality & HT Value per their applicable ASTM mfg requirements.
2. Have their hardness value clearly marked at the ends of each bar by the manufacturer.
3. Test Bar Selection (Material type & Hardness value) shall be selected to be "SIMILAR" to the test piece. (SAEP-355, Section 6)
3a. Test Bar Material shall be the same P-No as the Test Piece, unless CSD specifies otherwise.
3b. Test Bar Hardness Value shall be within +/- 10% of Maximum Specified Hardness (either 200 BHN, 225, 235, 248) allowed by SA.
NOTE: SELECT CORRECT "RANGE" OF TEST BARS: A range of test bars (100 - 400 BHN are sold) is required for BHT Test bars for production
work must be within +/- 10% of maximum specified Hardness (200 for Sour Service, ALL PLANT PIPING), 200 for vessel work or as specified in SAESA-301 at 225, 235, 248 for alloy steels). Check job specs for Matls to be PWHT (Piping Line Class, Data Sheets) as applicable. Before work begins,
ensure an available range/adequate supply of test bars is based on KNOWN material specs (CMTRs).
3c. RETESTING PRACTICE & INVESTIGATION OF UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS (PER STEP # 9) FOLLOW EXAMPLES BELOW
Example 1: A 188 BHN value test bar is used for HT of welds (200 BHN Sour Service line, test bar is P-No-1, within +/- 10% of max BHN). Test results
show 159 BHN value. Per Step # 9 of procedure, the result is invalid & retesting is required & should be performed with a bar of a hardness value
closer to 159 BHN value to obtain a valid result, even if it is below 200. Retests with same bar will result in retesting (over & over again). Per CSD, this
general retest policy is waived and is unnecessary as the final result will be under 200 & acceptable.
Example 2: Same 188 BHN value test bar is used for testing (235 BHN P-No 5 Heater Tubes ASTM A335, bar is the wrong P-No mat'l & not within +/10% of Max BHN value). Test bar must be selected per Example # 1 & P-No 5 Test bars of higher HT value are needed.
Example 3: A 225 BHN value test bar is obtained for testing Example # 2 Heater Tubes (P-5 mat'l within +/- 10% of Max BHN value). Weld readings
(U-bends) show 351 BHN value. Metallurgical Investigation of U-bends & welds finds all sampled readings (300+) using correct range of test bars.
Investigation follows. CSD rejects the welds & requires PWHT & RT (disposition). Further investigation revealed that the Heater Tubes (over 3,000
total) were never PWHT'd, yet all had been accepted by HT reports using Equotip method. See Checklist Item D7.
Page 8 of 9
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2012
11-Dec-13
WELD(Plant Piping, Pipelines, Vessels & Tanks)
Alternative Hardness Testing Equipment for Branch Connection & Fillet welds, etc
1. Krautkramer Microdur 10 (MIC-10) is one of two equipment types allowed. Rebound type or Leeb portable testers that use spring-loaded probes
(specifically Proceq Equotip and others) are prohibited for use in SA. (See SAEP-355, Para. 6.2.1). Krautkramer Microdur MIC 10 portable hardness
testers require a careful selection of interchangeable probes to obtain Hardness readings from welds with geometries inaccessible to BHT (branch
connections, fillets, curved/convex surfaces, etc). Provide/document/demonstrate operator training. Careful test surface prep (fine grind/finish, 400 grit
per COMPANY for reliable result) is required. Verify 10% of MIC-10 readings by BHT comparison. (Once daily with testing/minimum). Take BHT
readings as close as possible to MIC-10 readings, accuracy to be within 10% with acceptable BHT results. (NACE RP0175, Para. 3.4,
owner/user option for alternative equip).
2. MIC-20 & later generations of Krautkramer Microdur technology can be applied (pending COMPANY approval).
1a. Krautkramer Microdur 10 (MIC-10) Manual Probes req'd for tight convex geometries are: Article (Model) MIC 201/ 205 with Test Load 10 N (1
kgf) / 50N (5 kgf). Portable kits must have calibration standards of known Rockwell Hardness, Hardness Conversion Tables, instructions & laminated
cards for calibration (Keep these on site with equipment to demonstrate calibration accuracy)
2. MiniBrineller (a miniature version of the Telebrinell) is also acceptable per COMPANY. Information on these unit complete kits can be obtained
@ http://www.ndtech.net/products/minibrineller.html Verify 5-10% of Minibrineller readings by BHT (Telebrinell), same as MIC-10.
Page 9 of 9
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Inspection of Repair on Weld Joints or Base Metal by
Welding (Prior to Weld Acceptance)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
MH's SPENT
PASS
FAIL
GENERAL REQMTS (See Note 1, Attachment 1, SAIC-W-2008, SAIC-W-2016 & SAIC-W-2036 Related to Repairs)
A1
COMPANY was notified before Repairs. (RT results, etc).

An agreed upon system shall be set in place on all projects .
Prime Contractor shall witness repair excavation by Sub Contactor. SA
Inspector shall have a chance to witness any such excavation of repairs.
" GLASS WINDOW POLICY " exists regarding repairs.
QUALITY PLAN
REQUIREMENT
NDE Kickoff
Meeting Topic
A2
Weld did not meet code or standard acceptance criteria.

NDE PROCESS CONTROL PROCEDURE details Repair Practice.
This was strictly followed regarding repair verification, weld ID, NDE &
repair markings, NDE reporting, & disposition of repairs.
Prime Contractor & Sub, NDE Service Provider follow protocol
NDE markings are verified, and correct joint was repaired by
qualified welders with approved JCCs.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.7
QUALITY PLAN
REQUIREMENT
A3
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database and recording of repairs and status:

A) Meets S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Sect. 8 Weld Tracking. (SAIC-W-2008)
B) Backlogs are tallied and reported.
C) COMPANY has received any RT Film (original & repairs)
D) Tracer welds are selected and tested for repair joints
Repair is actually reported in Database & documented .
QUALITY PLAN
REQUIREMENT
Repair of Welds Rejected by Radiography or Other NDE Methods
B1
Weld cut-out was performed on welds that has been repaired twice. Note: S-PM-G000-15200011,
Exception to this is when additional repair attempts are allowed by
Para. 20.1
COMPANY .
B2
Cracked welds (except for crater cracks) are repaired by cut-out unless a
repair is approved by COMPANY assigned inspector. Crater cracks are
ground out & MT examined (or PT).
Repair of Welds due to Base Metal or Welding Consummables (Tie-Ins to Existing Equipment or Piping, etc)
C1
Cracks related to base metal or welding consumables shall be

evaluated by COMPANY BEFORE any repair attempt.
See
Note 2 in C2.
C2
If a repair to a crack is approved, Repair & Inspection Procedure was

reviewed & approved by COMPANY prior to excavation of defects.
Note 1: Additional checklist items shall be added to this checklist to
include conditions & inspection reqmts and acceptance criteria for repair
of weld. See examples below .
Note 2: When tie-in welds to existing piping in services such as
S-PM-G000-1520Hydrogen, Caustic, Sulphur Recovery, Acid Gas, Wet H2S, other services
0011,
as covered in API 571, etc ... Weldability shall be considered as well as
Para. 20.2
additional cleaning beyond the 25mm rule, ph testing for process
saturated surfaces, and crack preventive measures such as "FULL OR
PARTIAL BAKE OUTs" & increased PREHEAT TEMPSs ... as outlined
in API 571.
Determine
reason for cracking (Weld Service environment)
Page 1 of 14
TRAVEL TIME
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.2
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.2
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

Weld Repair Inspection
SAIC NUMBER
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
SAIC-W-2013
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C3
Repair of Parent material mechanical damage, pitting marks: The

extent of repair allowed is as per parent material specification / code. If
needed the section of parent material / item with damage shall be
replaced. All the repair shall follow the approved project repair procedure
/ method statement.
ASME Sec II
C4
Consumable related repairs have been identified & corrective action

has been taken regarding WPS Parameter monitoring & removal of
existing consumables (same lot, batch number) to prevent reoccurrence.
Furthermore, Quality Manager has taken action regarding SAIC-W-2009,
Attachment 1 regarding Acceptable Storage Practices & maintaining a
Dry Environment for Electrodes.
NCR was
issued & defective consumables were removed from site
Root cause and corrective actions implemented was determined and
agreed upon by the authorized SA Inspector covering Repairs.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.2
ASME B31.3 CODE REQUIRED CONSIDERATIONS, WELDER & QUALITY INSPECTOR RESPONSIBILITY (DEFECT EXCAVATION)
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Action: Construction & Quality Mgrs shall ensure that Welders & Inspectors perform the following checks with due diligence in a spirit of cooperation &
getting Costly Repair done right on FIRST REPAIR ATTEMPTS. The need for a 2nd Repair Attempt indicates a failure and a Quality system
breakdown (lack of knowledge, diligence & communication), especially related to NDE findings (markings, repair instruction). Second Repair Attempts
(costly, inefficient) are easily preventable. In all cases, 2nd repair excavations shall be attended by Stakeholders & their Supervision who shall witness
& determine that excavations & rewelding are successful (retrain welders, Inspectors as needed).
SA INSPECTORS SHOULD NEVER HAVE TO BE APPROACHED IN ORDER TO APPROVE A 3RD WELDING REPAIR ATTEMPT.
D1
ASME B31.3, Para 328.6 Weld Repair:

A) A weld defect to be repaired shall be removed to sound metal.
B) Repair welds shall be made using a qualified welding procedure.
C) Repair welds shall be made recognizing that the cavity to be repaired
may differ in contour & dimensions from the original joint.
WELDER & INSPECTOR ACHIEVE RESULTS (FIRST REPAIR)
ASME B31.3,
Para. 328.6
D2
INSPECTOR VERIFIES THAT THE DEFECT HAS BEEN REMOVED.

1. Inspector verifies NDE marks & joint ID are accurate (excavation).
2. Inspector uses face shield to witness excavation (safe practice).
3. Welder excavates "in careful stages" (defect location)
4. Inspector checked that defects were "Chased until removed".
5. Inspector rechecks excavated area vs. exact film defect location.
6. Inspector conferences with welder & both make the call for any further
excavation based on a) welder intimate knowledge b) the excavation
dimensions & contour favor total cut out c) excavation does not
accurately match NDE results or d) "Nothing was found".
Decision: Was the excavation successful? Can a repair weld be made
after clean up grinding & NDE (root opening size, slope, etc).
Additionally NDT may be requested as needed to confirm the
removal defective areas (MT, UT and RT )
ASME B31.3,
Para. 328.6
Weld Repair
Considerations
D3
EXCAVATION CONTOUR IS WELDABLE (NO CUT-OUT REQ'D):

1. Sound Metal shall be visible in the area identified by the repair.
2. Inspector checks contour of excavation prior to NDE to verify that any
steep sharp angles/slopes are contour ground (weldable).
3. Verify clean metal after regrinding (use magnification as needed)
This is especially critical on 2nd repair attempts, and this is often
the very reason a second repair was required.
ASME B31.3,
Para. 328.6
Weld Repair
Considerations
D4
INSPECTOR VERIFIES EXCAVATION IS ACCEPTABLE.

1. Sound Metal is visible in the area identified by the repair.
2. Inspector witnesses NDE (MT or PT) of the excavated area.
3. Where a root opening exists, Inspector verifies Post-Cleaning
thoroughly removes residues (MPT particles, PT developer) by flushing or
use of compressed air AND Preheating while brushing to remove residual
contaminants that can affect weld repair quality.
ASME B31.3,
Para. 328.6
Weld Repair
Considerations
Page 2 of 14
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
D5
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
SAIC-W-2013
REFERENCE
COMPANY Assigned INSPECTOR WAS NOTIFIED & WITNESSED

2ND REPAIR ATTEMPT (EXCAVATION & REWELDING) ... WITNESS
POINT!
ANY
SUPPLEMENTAL NDE IS PERFORMED (AS REQUESTED).
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Section 20
REWELDING OF EXCAVATIONS (WPS & NDE)
E1
Repair procedure may utilize a welding procedure previously approved by S-PM-G000-1520COMPANY in conjunction with a separate method statement or it may be
0011,
a separate detailed welding procedure.
Para. 20.4
E2
S-PM-G000-1520Replacement weld (Cut-out) was inspected as a repair by the use of the

0011,
relevant Inspection Checklist covered in the applicable SATIP for
Para. 20.5 &
Welding. Per S-PM-G000-1520-0006, Change weld ID (W01-R1 suffix). S-PM-G000-15200006,
Suffix shall no longer be identified as R1, R2.
Section 8
E3
All repaired welds shall be inspected using the original testing method.
Additional test methods may also be required, if deemed necessary by
the authorized COMPANY inspector.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.5
E4
Approved WPS applicable to the weld repair is available on site.
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para. 9.1.8
E5
Welding is performed by Qualified welders and in possession of the

applicable Job Clearance Cards).
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.2.5
Casual Repairs Based on Workmanship & Weld Profile, Visual or NDE Examination Results (See also SAIC-W-2007)
F1
Welds (Piping, Structural) are evaluated per Visual Acceptance Crtieria

of SAIC-W-2007 (ASME B31.3, AWS D1.1 code welds)
F2
Undercuts are ground to a smooth contour with the adjacent metal

surface. NOTE: Weld build-up performed on undercuts that exceed the
allowable limits indicated in the applicable code (SAIC-W-2007)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.5
F3
Arc strikes are removed by grinding.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.5
F4
MPT or PT, as applicable, is carried out after grinding of arc strikes.
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para. 13.8
F5
Crater cracks are removed by grinding. (MT/PT)
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.2
F6
Gouges and other indications of careless workmanship are removed by

grinding
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.5
F7
Repair of welds for alignment purpose should not be allowed with out
written approval of Aramco. All these repair welds shall undergo
PWHT/NDT/HT/Pressure testing as per the Approved repair procedure /
Method statement
Project weld
repair procedure
F8
Temporary welded attachments or temporary tack welds are removed by S-PM-G000-1520grinding. NOTE: Attachments are cut off no closer than 3 mm to the base
0011,
metal surface, prior to the required grinding.
Para. 13.6
F9
MPT or PT, as applicable, is carried out after repair by grinding or

re-welding on the ground areas.
REMARKS:
Page 3 of 14
SAIC-A-2007
As Referenced
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para. 13.8
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2013
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
NOTE 1: Use this checklist in conjunction with SAIC-W-2016 (Assessment of Weld Repairs). Weld Repair Reporting shall follow new
S-PM-G000-1520-0006, Section 8 Details. See Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE
APPROVAL AND WELD STATUS WITH NDT TRACKING
See also SAIC-W-2036 for Weld Modification or Re-Work After Weld Acceptance. Know the difference and the reqmts.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SAES-W-011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping, (30 March 2005)

SAEP-324, Certification Review and Registration of Project Welders and Brazers, (30 June, 2003)
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL AND WELD STATUS WITH NDT TRACKING
API RECOMMENDED PRACTICE 571, Damage Mechanisms Affecting Fixed Equipment in the Refining Industry (First Edition, Dec. 2003)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 4 of 14
N = NO F = FAILED
SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID - 18-MAY-05 - REV 2 (Standards Cutoff - December 2005)

REV 2
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2013
31-Dec-05
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL AND WELD

STATUS WITH NDT TRACKING
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Verify Hardness Testing - All Applications
SAIC-W-2014
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
SAUDI ARAMCO USE ONLY

ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (SPECIAL PROCESS CONTROL PER CONTRACT SCH Q & SAEP-1160)
Note:
Checklist applies to Plant Piping (S-PM-G000-1520-0011), Pipelines (SAES-W-012), Vessels (S-PM-G000-1520-0010) & Tanks (SAES-W017)
A1
Procedure is COMPANY approved and details criteria for weld ID &

weld selection for Hardness Testing including all responsibilities:
A) HT Sampling reqmts for specific production welds is available.
B) HT of PWHT welds (Service & thickness) is available (List).
Checklist SAIC-2012 has been utilized for the HT Procedure.
Scope of HT is known. Project specs are reviewed/approved.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Para. 8.1
A2
Data Mgmt & Tracking System (Database) is approved by COMPANY

prior to the start of work.
A) Full penetration groove & butt weld hardness tests are tracked
B) Socket & Fillet welds (Includes "other" weld or components specified
for Hardness Testing) are tracked.
Note: Reporting follow Welding Database reqmts as applicable
S-PM-G000-15200006
Para. 8.1
A3
Welds & items for Hardness Test shall have a unique ID clearly visible to
hardness test personnel & QC documenting test results. System is in
place to prevent errors in testing & documentation.
S-PM-G000-15200006
Para 8.1
TECHNIQUE & EQUIPMENT VERIFICATION (NACE RP0472, Appendix A, 12-Step Mandatory Guideline)
(Para 13.1)
B1
Test Personnel follow step by step method for hardness testing using
Portable Brinell Hardness Tester & NACE RP0472, App. A.
Verify Performance step by step per Attachment 2
Note 1: Procedure is available & personnel are trained in its use.
Note 2: Applicable project specs reflect this: NACE HT Exemption based
on welding processes in RP0472 are not applied at SA.
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A
B2
Portable Telebrinell Hardness Tester (Test Kit) is available for full

penetration groove and butt welds.
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A
B3
MIC-10 with correct model probes or Minibrinell Kit is available for HT of

fillet welds, branch connections, etc, where Telebrinell method is
inaccessible. See Attachment 2 Detailed Notes
Note 1: Equipment is available & personnel are trained in its calibration,
care & use to assure valid HT results. Ten (10) % of all results are
verified/compared against the Telebrinell method.
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.4
B4
Reference Bars with effective range for HT are available with QC

documenatation (Material composition, Hardness Value, etc).
See Attachment 2 Notes* for Reference Bar requirements
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
(*SAEP-355)
B5
EXTREME CARE shall be taken when grinding welds flat (Flat-top) to

prevent any / minimize base metal removal. Base metal removal was
checked by Inspection. No need exists for additional NDE (UT, etc) to
verify adequate remaining wall exists per material specs.
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Step # 1
B6
A 1.4 - 2.3-kg (3-5 lb) hammer for Telebrinell Portable Hardness Testers
(BHT) is being used. "As stamped" hammer head weight at 3-5 lb has
been verified to assure reliable HT results.
Note: Tests performed with incorrect weight hammer are invalid.
See Technique Note in Attach 2, Step 4 (QC Surveillance)
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Step # 4
Page 1 of 8
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2014
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
B7
Test bars are available for test verification by QC & SA Inspection. Visual
verification of test bars & Production welds shall verify that proper BHT
technique is used. Double impressions and use of more than 2 adjacent
sides is not allowed. Technicians made indentations within .1mm
roundness tolerance & followed the 12-step procedure
Note: Call for retraining & closer supervision* (Witness/Hold) for any
deficiencies found during witness of technician performance.
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Steps #
4, 5, 7, 11
B8
System for identifying rejected readings (Retests) on Test bars &

Production welds was followed. Indentations found out-of-round, double
impressions, out of 3-4 mm range, etc, require retesting. Permanent mark
(Sharpy pen, etc) "X" was placed over the invalid indentation(s) for retest.
Welds unmarked with unacceptable indentations on Production welds
shall be investigated and retested to extent necessary to ensure valid
Brinell Hardness test results.
Identify invalid test results & ensure Quality of HT results
NACE RP0472,
Appendix A,
Steps #
4, 5, 7, 11
B9
Weld deposits were hardness tested on the side contacting service

process whenever possible. If process side access is impractical, (piping
or small diameter vessels), HT was done on opposite side.
Sample accessible internal welds "randomly" & safely.
NACE RP0472,
Para 2.2.3
B10
BHT shall not be performed until AFTER welds are sufficiently cool and
an adequate time period has elapsed to ensure valid HT results.
WPS & Specification special instructions for PWHT & BHT were followed.
(No Delayed Hydrogen cracking concerns exist).
Sch. Q, Att IV,

Table 2.1 &
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.2
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
HARDNESS TESTING (HT) APPLICATION VERIFICATION

Note 1: Checklist Application covers Plant Piping, Pipelines, Vessels & Tanks as referenced. Use as "applicable to workscope".
Note 2: PWHT for Service at COMPANY includes: Caustic, MEA, DGA, ADIP, Boiler Deaerator, Hydrogen, DEA, etc. Review Specs carefully!
C1
COMPANY has specified PWHT & Production Weld HT including

sampling extent & Hardness Test criteria.
Note 1: Pipeline PWHT & HT (Production Welds) is extremely rare at
Saudi Aramco. This checklist does address HT as follows.
Note 2: If COMPANY specifies HT for Pipeline Production welds, follow
applicable equipment requirements & sampling practices within this
checklist for Plant Piping, unless otherwise specified by COMPANY.
PIPELINES
SAES-W-012,
Para 13.1
C2
P- No 1 Sour Service Production Welds receive 10% HT (min)

sampling for Plant Piping & Pipelines (*IF COMPANY specified on
Pipelines):
A) All welders making such welds are monitored by sampling.
B) All weld categories are sampled (groove, butt, fillet, other).
C) All weld repairs "as marked" are sampled.
D) Readings shall be taken at weld center & HAZ as close to weld edge
as possible after flat-topping welds
Note: Verify all Sour Line Classes on project are 10% sampled. Ensure
Line Class (Summary) & Specs do not contain errors.
PLANT PIPING
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.7,
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Para. 8.1
C3
P-No 1 & Alloy Steel Production Welds subject to PWHT for any
reason* (Service, Thickness, Code, COMPANY preference, etc) receive
PLANT PIPING
Hardness Testing as specified below:
S-PM-G000-1520A) PWHT Furnace Batch method = 10% Hardness Testing
0011, Para 16.2
B) Localized PWHT method = 100% Hardness Testing
&
C) SA specifies: 200 BHN for ALL P-No 1 welds. Other P-Nos &
Para. 16.3 &
Dissimilar welds follow HT criteria in Checklist Item C8.
ASME B31.3
D) Hardness Testing applies to groove, butt, fillet, other welds, etc
Para 331.1.7
Attachment 1
Note: If it gets heat treated for COMPANY, it gets Hardness Tested to
verify satisfactory PWHT as intended by the code.
Page 2 of 8
Rev 3

SAIC-W-2014
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
C4
PRESSURE VESSEL (ASME VIII, Div 1 & 2) HT :

(due to Service) test as per Checklist Item C6, C7, C8 below.
PRESSURE
VESSELS
S-PM-G000-1520unless specifically exempted from HT by COMPANY.
0010, Para 15.1
C) Vessels of P-No 4 or 5 Material
Note:
Test on internal side of all welds per Steps C6, C7.
C5
API TANKS (API 650) HT extent:

(due to Service), test per Checklist Items C6, C7, C8 below
Note: Test on internal side of all welds per Steps C6, C7.
API TANKS
SAES-W-017,
Para 13.1
C6
Vessel or Tank Butt welds, a minimum of one location per weld seam
shall be HT'd. One HT shall be made each 3 m (10 ft) of weld seam. In
addition, one hardness test shall be made on each nozzle flange-to-neck
and nozzle neck-to-shell/head weld.
VESSELS &
API TANKS
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.5
C7
Vessel or Tank Fillet welds, a minimum of one location per each

attachment shall be HT'd. In addition, One HT shall be made for each 3 m
(10 ft) of total attachment fillet weld length.
Note
1: Each WPS used shall be hardness tested.
Note 2: Each weld is tested at or near middle of weld bead*.
Note 3: *Follow Special Precautions (for Heat sinks) & test HAZ of
certain welds per NACE guidelines. See Remarks.
VESSELS &
API TANKS
NACE RP0472,
Para 3.6,
Para 4.5
C8
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA (Alloy steel listed by P-No) per ASME B&PV

Code Section IX. P-Nos meet maximum HBW values below:
A) 225 for P-3, P-4, P-10 (A, B, C, F), P-11
B) 235 for P-5A, P-5B (exception in C below), P-5C, P-6, P-7
Note: P-5C is listed at 241 in ASME B31.3 Heat Treatment Table
C) 248 for P-5B for 9Cr-1Mo-V grades (F91, P91, T91, WP91, Gr 9, and
C12A)
Note 1: HBW = Brinell Hardness Value taken @ weld
Note 2: SAES-A-301 supercedes ASME PWHT Table HT values for Item
"B" above (235 HBW). Attachment 1 lists a 241 value.
D) All dissimilar welds are HT'd (weld & HAZ) Attachment 1
Note: Code reqmt (PWHT or not, per ASME B31.3, Para. 331.1.7b)
ALL
SAES-A-301,
Para. 5.2.2 &
Table 6
Attachment 1
EVALUATE TEST RESULTS & PROVIDE DISPOSITION OF UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS (Use SATR-W-012)
(Para 13.1)
D1
Criteria is Properly Evaluated: If any reading exceeds specified limits by

no more than 10 BHN, a minimum of (3) additional readings shall be
made near the original high reading. If all (3) retests are below specified
limits, then the joint is acceptable. If any retest reading(s) exceed
specified limits, the weld is unacceptable.
This is a common requirement for all COMPANY applications
Page 3 of 8
ALL
SAES-W-STDs
Plant Piping,
Pipelines,
Vessels &
API Tanks
Rev 3

SAIC-W-2014
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
D2
Verify: If any welds are found to be unacceptable, then two additional

welds from the same lot* shall be tested. If more than one weld in a lot is
found unacceptable, then all welds in that lot shall be tested. (Plant
PLANT PIPING
Piping, Pipelines as applicable).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Note 1: Applies to Sour Service welds tested (10%). Additional welds
Para. 16.5
selected shall be from same welder. Sample all welders.
Note 2: Furnace "Batch" welds PWHT & HT'd at 10% rate, ANY result
unacceptable shall be cause for entire "batch" to be tested.
D3
Investigation Practice (Unacceptable HT results HAZ, Weld):

A) Fittings (Flanges, Wrought Ells, tees, etc) per 02-SAMSS-005/11 can
arrive IK "out of spec" with unacceptable hardnesses, despite OOK
quality efforts to obtain acceptable* values (*See Item D8).
B) When HAZ unacceptable readings are found, investigate fittings first, S-PM-G000-1520then weld consumables next. Take two readings on fittings in question
0011,
(180 degrees apart) to verify the LOT (fittings same heat) meets specified
Para. 16.5,
hardness limits. If unacceptable material hardness is found, take
Sch. Q, Att IV,
additional readings (as agreed upon, per procedure) within the same LOT
Table 2.1 &
& take appropriate Vendor action on Projects.
C)
(CPI)
Unacceptable weld values require investigation of consumable lots, WPS
values, & welders making such welds, especially when adjacent piping
and fittings are found within specified limits.
See Item D4 for Best Practice. ISO 9000 QPs follow CPI
D4
Verify Proactive Quality Measures for HT (CPI option):

A) Random HT checks on fittings "by lot" on receipt. Increase OOK HT
surveillance. Fittings & Lots with high HT values are identified for
Remedial* action (Increased Pre-Heat temp, PWHT). *See Item D.
B) Welding Consumables (by lot) as received (used on projects), shall
have sample hardness tests taken as early in projects as possible using
approved WPS to assure quality & prevent rework. Timely QC monitoring
is essential to prevent consumable problems.
Don't wait until hardness problems adversely affect projects
same as above
(Best Practice)
D5
Partial fabricated assemblies subject to completion on projects, PWHT

& HT (Vessel components, Boiler & Heater tubes, coils, etc) :
A) OOK work shall be sampled to an extent necessary based on
Receiving Insp Observations (Minimum = Random* HT).
B) Inspect incoming matl for BHT indentations (Visible, round)
Retest missing/unacceptable indentations or suspect results
same as above,
& S-PM-G0001520-0011, Para.
19.1.3*
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
12/11/2013
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS: Procedure shall contain the elements listed in the checklist above as a minimum: Originator & Reviewer verify conformance of written
procedure with reqmts specified in "Reference" column of this checklist. Procedure cannot be combined with PWHT procedure. Review all Project
Specs (Lines Classes, Design Sheets) & verify spec accuracy relevant to these HT requirements.
Special Precaution (Heat Sinks): Welds with great base metal disproportion often have low heat input & large sections act as significant heat sinks
that result in high cooling rates. Tray support rings in Pressure Vessels are one such example (NACE RP0472, Para 4.5). Tray Support Rings & Other
similar type welds having great disproportionate base metal thicknesses shall be tested in the HAZ as well as center of weld. This includes ANY similar
welds. HAZ HT testing shall verify proper pre-heat & NACE recommended control measures were taken during fabrication (Include in HT Procedure).
Test such welds at or near weld center & at HAZ as close as possible to weld. (MIC-10)
Page 4 of 8
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2014
PROJECT TITLE
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
ATTACHMENTS: 1. Attachment 1 - ASME B31.3 (Table 331.1.1, Requirements for Heat Treatment)
2. Attachment 2 - NACE RP0472, Appendix A (Suggested Guidelines (12-Steps) for Portable Brinell Hardness Testing (BHT) of Welds)
1. S-PM-G000-1520-0010 Welding Requirements for Pressure Vessels
3. SAES-W-012 (31 December 2002) Welding Requirements for Pipelines
4. SAES-W-017 (7 December 2005) Welding Requirements for API Tanks
5. SAES-A-301 (30 March 2005) Materials Resistant to Sulfide Stress Corrosion Cracking Now see ISO 15156
6. ASME B31.3 (2004 Edition) PROCESS PIPING
7. SAEP-355 (29 February, 2004) Field Metallography and Hardness Testing
8. NACE RP0472 (2005 Edition) Methods & Controls to Prevent In-Serv Cracking of CS Welds in P-1 Mat'l in Corr. Petroleum Refining Environ.
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 5 of 8
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2014
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1
ASME B31.3 Section 331.1.7 Hardness Tests (Mandatory). Hardness tests of production welds and of hot bent and
hot formed piping are intended to verify satisfactory heat treatment. The hardness limit applies to the weld & the heat
affected zone (HAZ) tested as close as practicable to the edge of the weld. (a) Where a hardness limit is specified in
Table 331.1.1, at least 10% of welds, hot bends, and hot formed components in each furnace heat treated batch and
100% of those locally heat treated shall be tested. (b) When dissimilar metals are joined by welding, hardness limits
specified for the base and welding materials in Table 331.1.1 shall be met for each material.
Page 6 of 8
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2014
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 2 - NACE RP0472, Appendix A

(12-Steps) for Portable Brinell Hardness Testing (BHT) of Welds
1. Grind hardness test area flush with base metal. A smooth, relatively flat surface improves accuracy of hardness readings. One method to achieve
this is finish grinding with an 80 or finer grit sandpaper disc. Do not take hardness readings on scaled or discolored areas.
2. Insert the hardness test bar into the holder with the spacing button in the extreme forward position.
3. Ensure that the hardness test block is flat on the test surface.
4. Make the impressions by striking the anvil nut squarely with a 1.4- to 2.3-kg (3.0- to 5.0-lb) hammer. Pull the hammer away so it does not rebound or
restrike the anvil. Note (Technique): Training/practice is needed for consistency in BHT. Technique is checked by indentation roundness (Step 5).
Tolerance for roundness is .1mm. If the indentation does not appear to be perfectly round to the human eye, it almost always is not within specified
tolerances & retest is required. Use eyepiece to verify suspected out of round impressions visually spotted.
5. Measure the impression on weld hardness test site by placing the microscope so that the impression is approximately in the center of the scale.
Adjust eyepiece so the scale and the top of the impression are in sharp focus. Measure the diameter of the impression to nearest half division (0.050
mm [0.002 in.]); it should be between 3.0 to 4.0 mm (0.12 to 0.16 in.) (if not, discard the hardness test and redo it). Rotate eyepiece 90 degrees and
obtain a second diameter reading. If the two diameter readings vary by more than 0.100 mm (0.004 in.) (i.e., the impression is oblong), discard the
hardness test & redo it. If acceptable, average the two diameter readings for a recorded result.
6. Repeat the procedure in Step 5 to measure the impression on the hardness test bar.
7. To do subsequent hardness testing, move the spacing button one notch toward the rear. This ensures that impressions on the hardness test bar are
properly spaced and avoids double impressions. Continue this practice for succeeding impressions until one-half of one side of the bar is covered with
impressions. Then remove and reverse the bar, and again move the spacing button to the extreme front position.
8. Determine the Brinell hardness number by using the slide calculator supplied by the manufacturer
9. Subtract the determined weld hardness from the test bar hardness. The difference should be -10 to +50; if not, discard the hardness reading and do
a retest with a new hardness test bar. The new hardness test bar should have a hardness closer to the weld hardness to improve the hardness reading
accuracy. (Note: See Reference Bar Requirements below)
10. All hardness impressions at one test location should have at least 6.4 mm (0.25 in.) between their nearest edges.
11. Hardness impressions can be made on only two adjacent sides of the hardness test bars.
12. Replace indenter ball when it is out-of-round. (Inspect & rotate ball regularly, disassemble to rotate & inspect for flat spots)
REFERENCE (TEST) BAR REQUIREMENTS (Step # 9 of Procedure)

Note: Brinell Hardness Testing (BHT) is a self-calibrating method based on hardness impression comparison. Reference bars are M&TE, simply
Calibration standards of "Known" Material Composition & Hardness Values. (SAEP-355, Sect 6)
BHT Reference (Test) Bars are M&TE and shall:
1. Be from a Certified source (QC Record, CMTRs) to attest to their quality & HT Value per their applicable ASTM mfg requirements.
2. Have their hardness value clearly marked at the ends of each bar by the manufacturer.
3. Test Bar Selection (Material type & Hardness value) shall be selected to be "SIMILAR" to the test piece. (SAEP-355, Section 6)
3a. Test Bar Material shall be the same P-No as the Test Piece, unless COMPANY specifies otherwise.
3b. Test Bar Hardness Value shall be within +/- 10% of Maximum Specified Hardness (either 200 BNH, 225, 235, 248) allowed by SA.
NOTE: SELECT CORRECT "RANGE" OF TEST BARS: A range of test bars (100 - 400 BHN are sold) is required for BHT Test bars for production
work must be within +/- 10% of maximum specified Hardness (200 for Sour Service, ALL PLANT PIPING), 200 for vessel work or as specified in SAESA-301 at 225, 235, 248 for alloy steels). Check job specs for Matls to be PWHT (Piping Line Class, Data Sheets) as applicable. Before work begins,
ensure an available range/adequate supply of test bars is based on KNOWN material specs (CMTRs).
3c. RETESTING PRACTICE & INVESTIGATION OF UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS (PER STEP # 9) FOLLOW EXAMPLES BELOW
Example 1: A 188 BHN value test bar is used for HT of welds (200 BHN Sour Service line, test bar is P-No-1, within +/- 10% of max BHN). Test results
show 159 BHN value. Per Step # 9 of procedure, the result is invalid & retesting is required & should be performed with a bar of a hardness value
closer to 159 BHN value to obtain a valid result, even if it is below 200. Retests with same bar will result in retesting (over & over again). Per
COMPANY, this general retest policy is waived and is unnecessary as the final result will be under 200 & acceptable.
Example 2: Same 188 BHN value test bar is used for testing (235 BHN P-No 5 Heater Tubes ASTM A335, bar is the wrong P-No mat'l & not within +/10% of Max BHN value). Test bar must be selected per Example # 1 & P-No 5 Test bars of higher HT value are needed.
Example 3: A 225 BHN value test bar is obtained for testing Example # 2 Heater Tubes (P-5 mat'l within +/- 10% of Max BHN value). Weld readings
(U-bends) show 351 BHN value. Metallurgical Investigation of U-bends & welds finds all sampled readings (300+) using correct range of test bars.
Investigation follows. COMPANY rejects the welds & requires PWHT & RT (disposition). Further investigation revealed that the Heater Tubes (over
3,000 total) were never PWHT'd, yet all had been accepted by HT reports using Equotip method. See Checklist Item D5.
Alternative Hardness Testing Equipment (2 Approved by COMPANY) for Branch Connection & Fillet welds, etc
1. Krautkramer Microdur 10 (MIC-10) is one of two equipment types allowed. Rebound type or Leeb portable testers that use spring-loaded probes
(specifically Proceq Equotip and others) are prohibited for use in SA. (See SAEP-355, Para. 6.2.1). Krautkramer Microdur MIC 10 portable hardness
testers require a careful selection of interchangeable probes to obtain Hardness readings from welds with geometries inaccessible to BHT (branch
connections, fillets, curved/convex surfaces, etc). Provide/document/demonstrate operator training. Careful test surface prep (fine grind/finish, 400 grit
per COMPANY for reliable result) is required. Verify 10% of MIC-10 readings by BHT comparison. (Once daily with testing/minimum). Take BHT
readings as close as possible to MIC-10 readings, accuracy to be within 10% with acceptable BHT results. (NACE RP0175, Para. 3.4,
owner/user option for alternative equip).
2. MIC-20 & later generations of Krautkramer Microdur technology can be applied (pending COMPANY approval).
1a. Krautkramer Microdur 10 (MIC-10) Manual Probes req'd for tight convex geometries are: Article (Model) MIC 201/ 205 with Test Load 10 N (1
kgf) / 50N (5 kgf). Portable kits must have calibration standards of known Rockwell Hardness, Hardness Conversion Tables, instructions & laminated
cards for calibration (Keep these on site with equipment to demonstrate calibration accuracy)
Page 7 of 8
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2014
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
2. MiniBrineller (a miniature version of the Telebrinell) is also acceptable per COMPANY. Information on these unit complete kits can be obtained
@ http://www.ndtech.net/products/minibrineller.html Verify 5-10% of Minibrineller readings by BHT (Telebrinell), same as MIC-10.
Page 8 of 8
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Selection of Welds for NDE (On-Plot Piping & Structures)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2015
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
General Requirements for S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Database (Selection of Welds for NDT shall meet S-PM-G000-1520-0006
Reqmts)
A1
Weld Selection for NDT shall be identified in design along with the
Welding specification per line class & per line (SAES-L-310, Sect 7) This
is set forth in a proposed project NDE specification for owner Inspector
approval (COMPANY Assigned Inspector responsibility per ASME B31.3
& COMPANY).
Follow
the NDE SATIP & NDE Process Control Procedure
Project NDE
Spec Reqmt,
SAES-L-310,
Section 7
A2
Weld Selection for NDT shall be identified (collected, linked, &

maintained for each weld applicable) on an S-PM-G000-1520-0006
Database. When UT is used in lieu of RT the tracking & reporting
requirements shall remain the same. See also SAIC-W-2008 Checklist.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.1
A3
Weld Selection for NDT ... See Attachment 1

A) Sequence of Process & NDT is critical. (NDT of PWHT welds for PNos 3, 4 & 5 materials prior to PWHT should be considered for
information only & not final acceptance. The intent is to evaluate the weld S-PM-G000-1520quality prior to PWHT so any unacceptable discontinuities can
0006,
be repaired prior to PWHT. (Spec shall state sequence of NDE)
Section 8.1
B) NDE Process Control Procedure is used (SAIC-NDT-2010 Series)
C) Design Information & Code Criteria (Based on Service)
... Ex: Severe Cycle Service has different code acceptance criteria
A4
NDT Control and Identification ... See Attachment 1

This number, once assigned to a weld, shall remain with weld until final
acceptance. Repeated NDT on a weld shall be indicated by adding or
modifying the NDT Report Number suffix similar to that used for weld
repair as stated below.
NDT Process Control Procedure is also req'd. See Notes.
A5
Selection of Tracer Welds ... See Attachment 1

A) Two tracer welds must be selected for each rejected weld in a 10% RT
system. The two welds must have been welded by the same welder using
S-PM-G000-1520the same welding process and use the NDT method as the initial weld for
0006,
evaluation.
Section 8.1
B) Progressive sampling of welds (tracer welds) shall follow the
progressive sampling method as stated in governing SAES. Tracer welds
are not to be counted in the 10% sampling process.
A6
Results of RT Film Evaluation by COMPANY

A) Welds rejected for weld quality requiring repair have their original
weld id numbers modified by suffix & progression
(R1, R2, T1, T2, T1R1, T1R2, T2R1, T2R2, etc)
B) Welds rejected for film quality (error exists in SAEP-1160) require
reshoot as follows:
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.1
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8.1
W-01 (Reshoot) ... using lead letter ID

See also SAIC-RT-2010 Checklist
A7
Initial production work of contractor welders shall be monitored by

the project inspector to determine their ability to make sound welds.
Page 1 of 20
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.2.6
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2015
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
A8
For progressive examination requirements, a lot shall be defined as all of

the same kind of welds made since the last acceptable weld, excluding
"penalty" examinations, for a given welder from any previous production
on a specific line classification.
S-PM-G000-15200011 Para.
19.1.9
A9
The progressive examination shall be limited to the specific welder with

the defective welds.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.9
A10
The last acceptable weld is defined as a weld that has been examined
and accepted by both RT (or UT) and all other specified NDT methods
(visual, PT, MT).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.9
A11
The "same kind" of weld is defined as: the same process or

combination of processes, same type of joint (groove vs. fillet), and
same P-Number. Different diameters and wall thicknesses may be
classified within the "same kind" of weld.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.9
A12
CONTRACTOR DATABASE MAKES EVERY ATTEMPT TO MINIMIZE

EXCESSIVE NDE ON 10% LINES BY UTILIZING AN NDE DATABASE
PER WELDER WEEKLY PRODUCTION. This requires "lot & kind" be
established by agreement at the start of the project. Using an "ISObased" lot and kind results in excessive NDE exceeding 10% reqmt.
Note: Where less than 100% radiographic coverage is reqd, random
selection of welds is based on the weekly weld production.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.9 &
Para. 19.5.2 &
BEST PRACTICE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
Initial Testing of Newly Certified Welders (JCC cards have been issued) ... Selection shall be based as follows:
1) Welders shall prove themselves capable of quality welding at the start of production.
2) Quality welding is clearly defined below as related to the start of a Project.
3) Project NDE Specs (Notes) or Process Control Procedure shall specify initial quality to maintain qualifications.
B1
Initial 3* butt welds of each welder are selected for RT.

*Other numbers exceeding 3 may be tested per Contractor. *List
amount tested ____________.
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.2.6
B2
Initial 3* socket welds for each welder are selected for RT.
Welders shall meet all requirements listed in SAIC-W-2037.
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.2.6
B3
INITIAL WELD QUALITY & WELDER STATUS SHALL BE THAT

WELDERS PASS ALL THREE WELDS (INITIAL PRODUCTION).
SAEP-324,
Note: Welder proceeds with Production subject to the NDE spec.
Para. 6.2.6 &
Welder shall maintain an acceptable repair rate as agreed upon
SAES-W-011,
FAILURE OF ANY OR ALL OF FIRST THREE WELDS SHALL:
Para. 8.4 &
A) Result in welder disqualification (Pull JCC, Return to SA)
S-PM-G000-1520B) Result in welder close monitoring and retraining and:
0011, Para 19.1.3
1) Additional 100% RT for 1 entire week's production after the initial three
See
welds were tested (RT) to determine if a welder can make Quality Welds
SAIC-W-2016
0.50% Linear, 10% Joint Basis per SAIC-W-2016.
(Pre-Job
2) Welder shall be given a maximum of 2 full week's production, each
Agreement)
evaluated separately (weekly) or 10 joints minimum to demonstrate his
ability to COMPANY to make sound welds.
SAES-W-011, Section 17.5 (NDT Coverage) & ASME B31.3 NDE Selection Requirements
Page 2 of 20
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-W-2015
PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C1
NDT Coverage
All welds are inspected per ASME B31.3 & S-PM-G000-1520-0011.
SERVICE CATEGORY IS DESIGNATED & KNOWN:
A) CATEGORY D = D
CATEGORY M = M
C) NORMAL SERV = N
D) SEVERE CYCLE = S
NEVER SELECT OR EVALUATE NDE WITHOUT USING THE
CORRECT SERVICE CATEGORY AND CODE CRITERIA!
SEE ATTACHMENT 2 (ASME TABLE 341.3.2)
C2
Visual Examination: (Table 341.3.2 Criteria)

A) All welds shall be visually examined. Visual exam shall be performed
(and accepted) prior to other NDT.
Visual Exams
B) Where accessible, welds shall be visually examined from root side to
S-PM-G000-1520ensure that proper penetration & fusion have been achieved
0011,
C) Service & Category (Normal, D, M, Severe Cycle) must be known
Para. 19.5.1
Verify SAIC-W-2007 Final Inspection Checklist is covered thoroughly
& understood by Inspectors performing visuals. Those supervising
NDE ensure techs understand the criteria.
C3
Butt welds in piping shall be RT'd as required below and:

A) If a weld falls under multiple classifications, the most stringent
requirement is applicable.
RT Exams
B) Minimum percent coverage of specified NDT method may be
increased (at any level up to 100%) if, in the opinion of authorized
S-PM-G000-1520COMPANY inspector, welds are of questionable workmanship or if NDT
0011,
indicates an excessive number of defects.
Para. 19.5.2
C) Additional or alternative NDT methods may be used at the discretion of
the authorized COMPANY inspector in order to assist in determining the
type or extent of defects.
C4
For welds below 100% RT requirements, selection of welds is based on

the weekly weld production at a minimum. The detailed requirements of
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 apply. (Backlog basis = 7 days)
RT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.2
C5
Weld joints selected due to progressive examination requirements (after

weld defects are found) shall not count toward the required overall exam
frequency (%). Tracer shot is the correct term per S-PM-G000-15200006. Many still refer to the term Penalty* shot. *This implies just
what it is, a Penalty requiring extra work
RT Exams,
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.1.9
C6
B)
Onshore Piping RT & Offshore Piping RT Reqmts:

See Attachment 3 Tables & Notes.
Note: Error in Note 2. It should read P-3, P-4, & P-5. These P-Nos are
for Low & Intermediate Alloys. P-6 is not used at COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5
RT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.2.1
C7
For on-shore piping, at least 10% of the each week's production weld
(circumferential girth welds), are radiographed for:
SEE ATTACHMENT 3
Shop is an indoor facility approved by COMPANY per SAIC-L-2031.
RT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.2.1
C8
For on-shore piping, 100% RT is performed on the following:

SEE ATTACHMENT 3
RT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.2.1
Page 3 of 20
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2015
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
C9
For off-shore piping top side piping in Category D fluid service above 18C (includes all lines over water, over tidal flats, or within 30 m of the
shoreline), 10% of the weekly production welds are random selected for
radiography. These are:
a. Firewater systems
b. Raw water system
c. Pressure sewer system
d. All open non-pressure vents and drains
(NOTES: a. Stainless steel in chlorinated sea water is excluded.
b. Results are interpreted to "normal fluid service".)
C10
For off-shore top side piping (includes all lines over water, over tidal flats,
or within 30 m of the shoreline), 100% of the welds of piping systems
S-PM-G000-1520listed below are selected for radiography:
0011, Para.
a. All services other than Category D fluids
19.5.2.2
b. Stainless steel in chlorinated sea water service.
C11
Selection of welds for 10% RT is strictly controlled by procedure.

RT Process Control Procedure details all aspects of Weld Selection for
NDE. Refer to SAIC-RT-2010 for details.
SAIC-RT-2010
C12
Selection of welds for 10% RT includes welds completed by each welder.

{ASME B31.3, Para. 341.4.1 (b) (1)}
as referenced
C13
Weld joints completed by the welder each day are recorded per S-PMG000-1520-0006 requirements, Section 8.
C14
Where multiple welders are used to weld a particular joint, daily weld
S-PM-G000-1520record shall indicate the weld area covered by each welder, ie: Root weld,
0006, Section 8
hot pass, capping etc.
C16
Magnetic Particle Testing & Liquid Penetrant Testing

Magnetic particle testing (MT) for ferromagnetic materials.
Liquid penetrant testing (PT) for non-ferromagnetic materials.
Exception: PT shall be allowed for small diameters where MT (yoke)
is cumbersome & impractical. This includes SW
MT/PT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.3
C17
Pressure containing welds, other than butts, 100% MT/PT.

Includes Branch Connections, Weldolets, Sockolets, & Welding
Bosses ... Any other Groove welded fittings.
MT/PT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.3.1
C18
All attachment welds on pressurized components that are not

hydrotested after making the attachment weld shall be 100%
examined.
MT/PT Exams
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 19.5.3.2
D
D1
D2
E
E1
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para.
19.5.2.2
S-PM-G000-15200006, Section 8
WELD MODIFICATIONS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE (SEE ALSO SAIC-W-2036, SAIC-W-2013 & SAIC-W-2015)
Engineering Change Notice Procedure* covers such work.
ID, Numbering, NDE & Special Processes are controlled.
NDE Process Control Procedure was followed. Database was used to
record NDE results. NDE sequence was followed relative to any special
process such as PWHT. SA Inspector witnessed the NDE.
Special Process
AWS D1.1 Structural Steel Welding, Repairs & NDE (All Applications of AWS D1.1)
Welding & Selection of NDE meets AWS D1.1 requirements:
A) Visual Examination Criteria
B) Repair Methods & Required Selection of NDE
See Attachment 4 for AWS D1.1 Required NDT.
Page 4 of 20
See
SAIC-M-2012
12-SAMSS-007,
Para. 6.1.6
WELD-
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

PROJECT TITLE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2015
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS:
NOTES: 1) Contractor's NDE Specification (Based on Line Class Tables & Design) & NDE Process Control Procedure shall cover elements
of this checklist and provide clear direction for NDE Service Provider Companies, along with close supervision. This requires training and
coordination between the Prime Contractor supervising the work, any Subcontractor (also supervises work) & the NDE Service Provider.
DO NOT BYPASS THIS CHECKLIST IN LIEU OF A PROJECT NDE SPECIFICATION. USE APPLICABLE ELEMENTS & ATTACHMENTS.
Attachments:
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL AND WELD STATUS WITH
NDT TRACKING
Attachment 2 - ASME B31.3 Process Piping Welding Acceptance Criteria (Table 341.3.2)
Attachment 3 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 Onshore & OffShore NDE Requirements
Attachment 4 - Structural Steel Welding Requirements, Repairs & NDE (AWS D1.1)
1. SAES-W-011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping, 30 th March, 2005
2. SAEP-324, Certification Review and Registration of Project Welders and Brazers, (30 June, 2003)
3. S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL AND WELD STATUS WITH NDT TRACKING
4. 12-SAMSS-007, Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel (30 April 2005)
5. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Steel Welding Code (Latest Edition)
6. ASME B31.3, Process Piping, (Latest Edition)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
PID Representative

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 5 of 20
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2015
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE

APPROVAL AND WELD STATUS WITH
Page 6 of 20
Page 7 of 20
Page 8 of 20
Page 9 of 20
Page 10 of 20
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2015
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
ASME B31.3 EQUAL LEG FILLET WELD (Fig 328.5.2A) - Acceptable Fillet Weld Shape & Contour
Note: Leg Size shall be determined by Fillet Gage* (Properly Used Depending upon the weld contour)
Page 11 of 20
Page 12 of 20
Page 13 of 20
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2015
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 3 - S-PM-G000-1520-0011 Onshore & OffShore NDE Requirements
Page 14 of 20
MT & PT REQUIREMENTS
Page 15 of 20
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2015
11-Dec-13
WELDAttachment 4 - Structural Steel Welding Requirements, Repairs & NDE (AWS D1.1)
Mill Discontinuities are resolved per AWS D1.1, NDE dispositioned & repaired as per Table 5.4 below.
AWS D1.1 Allowable Repairs (Note NDE Required)
NOTICE: ENGINEER & SA AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR* APPROVAL REQ'D. (AWS D1.1)
Page 16 of 20
Mislocated Holes (Common Repair in Plants)
526.5 (1) = VT, MT or PT .... 526.5 (2) = VT, MT or PT & RT (depending on location, severity) ... 526.5 (3) = VT, MT or PT & RT
Measurement shall be per calipers or Ultrasonic Thickness Meter if excess weld metal removal is checked
REPAIR OF WELD DEFECTS* FOUND DURING NDT(*Prohibited Discontinuity)
AWS NDT Specs (Section 6, Part C)

Notice: NDE shall be clearly defined (as stated in this Attachment or as agreed upon).
NDT SHALL BE SPECIFED (Noted in WPS) - SUBMITTED TO SA INSPECTOR FOR APPROVAL.
UT, MT, PT, RT shall be performed per detailed requirements & Acceptance Criteria Tables of this section.
BEAM & COLUMN SPLICING WELD REPAIRS (NOTICE TO THE CONTRACTOR)

1. Contractor shall have approved WPS & Repair Procedure. Cut edges shall be examined* for discontinuities.
2. Contractor shall specify 100% CJP (complete joint penetration) RT Quality welds as detailed in Procedure.
3. RT OR UT SHALL BE SPECIFIED BY ENGINEER AT 100% on butt-welded load bearing* members.
*Main frames and any extensions that are part of the lateral load carrying system such as splice welds for horizontal
piperack beams or vertical columns supporting piping loads in SA Plants. Other shapes (angles, etc) in non-load
bearing secondary applications are spliced with 100% CJP (10% RT Optional). Visual Exam = OK With Hold Points.
4. Contractor shall specify flush, smooth surface after welding per 5.24.4.1 "as required" for service application.
5. Contractor Inspection (NDE HOLD POINTS): Perform 100% VISUAL ON FIT-UP, ROOT PASS, FINAL
6. Contractor shall notify Authorized SA Inspector of ANY repair or splice weld BEFORE welding.
7. Contractor shall perform supplemental NDT based on Visual Exam (suspect areas, laminations, discontinuities).
QA/QC MGRs & ENGINEER ARE RESPONSIBLE TO IMPLEMENT ABOVE REQUIREMENTS ON PROJECTS.
Page 17 of 20
Page 18 of 20
12-SAMMS-007 WELDING INSPECTION REQMTS
Page 19 of 20
12-SAMMS-008 CORRECTION OF ERRORS (REPAIR PROCEDURE SHALL COPY & PASTE ELEMENTS)
PIP STS05130 CORRECTION OF ERRORS (REPAIR PROCEDURE TO INCLUDE)
Page 20 of 20
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Production Weld & Welder Repair Rate Assessment for
On-Plot Piping
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2016
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Repair Rate Assessment (S-PM-G000-1520-0006 & PROCEDURE REQMTS)
A1
Type of defects found either by visual or by NDE (welds rejected) are

identified & recorded per SAEP-1160. See Attachment 1.
A2
Monitoring of Weld Repair Rate as stated in the Contractor Procedure

[COMPANY Assigned Inspector Targets 5% (Joint Basis) & 0.10%
BUTT WELDS
Procedure
(Linear Basis) quality] with attention to the welders who do not conform
Requirement,
to Quality goals. Welders exceeding 10% (Joint Basis) & 0.50%
Basis is:
(Linear Basis) shall be retrained, monitored, & subject to additional*
(Linear, Joint)
NDE:
A) Random
additional* weekly Production is examined for that week and evaluated on S-PM-G000-15200006,
a weekly & overall basis. (Up to 100% per COMPANY)
Section 9 &
B) Three weeks in a row (repair rate evaluated each week) above these
limits shall result in a loss of welder qualification (butt welds).
Sch Q
COMPANY shall request return of JCC & welder reassignment/removal
A3
Placing welders with unacceptable "BUTT WELD" repair rates on

socket welding IS PROHIBITED unless:
A) Welder passes qualification on first 3 production socket welds per
the detailed requirements of SAIC-W-2037.
B) Welder is closely monitored for conformance to approved WPS
regarding technique (QW 410 & other WPS Process Parameters.
Procedure,
Basis is:
(Linear, Joint)
A4
Project Weld repair rate and individual Welder repair rate have not
exceeded maximum weld repair rate agreed upon in the project.
NOTE: Indicate the agreed Target Weld Repair Rate: __________%
Procedure,
Basis is:
(Linear, Joint)
A5
Project Quality Plan has indicated corrective actions for welders whose
weld repair rate has exceeded agreed weld repair rate.
A6
Progressive examination is performed for every weld of the welder whose S-PM-G000-15200011,
weld has failed the RT. Refer to Attachment 2 for the method of
Para. 19.1.9
progressive examination. ( ASME B31.3, Para. 341.3.4)
A7
Root cause or causes of weld defects are determined, evaluated and

recorded. Corrective actions on the root causes are initiated to prevent
recurrence of the weld deficiencies.
A8
Weekly Weld Data is submitted each week per S-PM-G000-1520-0006,

Sections 8 & 9 (Butt weld, Socket & Fillet for Special Processes).
See Attachment 1
Note: For limited scope project work, fewer than 500 groove/butt weld
joints, contractor may elect to use hardcopy tracking system with
S-PM-G000-1520approval of SA Insp Dept. Reporting for these projects shall use the
0006
applicable SATR such as:
SATR weld/welder reports: SATR-W-2013
Weekly Welders Reject Rate, SATR-W-2018
Weekly Welder Repair & Tracer, SATR-W-2019
Weekly Weld Status Report, SATR-W-2008 Weld Summ Report
Page 1 of 8
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Section 8
Procedure
Schedule "Q",
Para. 7.3.4,
Para. 7.3.5
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

On-Plot Piping
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2016
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
A9
Actual Backlogs in accordance with S-PM-G000-1520-0006, Section 8.3.

shall be reported. See last page of Attachment 1 for elements.
Note: A backlog exists when Special Process results are not received &
recorded within a project-specific time, usually 7 days, after the welds
have been visually accepted.
S-PM-G000-15200006,
Para. 8.3
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
REMARKS:
ATTACHMENTS:
ATTACHMENT 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL ANDWELD STATUS WITH NDT TACKING
ATTACHMENT 2 - Progressive Examination Requirements for COMPANY Plant Piping
1, Schedule Q, Contractor's Quality Requirements, (December 2005 Edition & later)
3. S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL ANDWELD STATUS WITH NDT TACKING
4. ASME B31.3, Process Piping, (Latest Edition)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 8
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2016
11-Dec-13
WELDOn-Plot Piping
Attachment 1 - S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING PROCEDURE APPROVAL ANDWELD
STATUS WITH NDT TACKING
Page 3 of 8
Page 4 of 8
Page 5 of 8
Page 6 of 8
Page 7 of 8
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER

SAIC-W-2016
11-Dec-13
WELDOn-Plot Piping
Attachment 2 - Progressive Examination Requirements for COMPANY Plant Piping
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SECTION 8 PROGRESSIVE SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS
S-PM-G000-1520-0006 SECTION 8 PROGRESSIVE SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS
Clarifications (S-PM-G000-1520-0006 & S-PM-G000-1520-0011): There may be situations where only one Tracer Weld can
be selected. This shall be documented by Quality with reason listed for a single Tracer (Approved by Prime Supervising
Contractor & COMPANY). Per S-PM-G000-1520-0011, weld repairs of welds using "multiple welders" shall attribute such
repairs (and penalty shots) to a given welder. This gets complicated when welders making "root & hot pass" & welders
doing "fill & cap" for joints have to be assessed a repair against their record. Determined by RTFI & verified by Inspector
witnessing excavation (SAIC-W-2013)
Page 8 of 8
SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID - 18-MAY-05 - REV 0 (Standards Cut-off - June 2008)
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Control of Welding Consumables - Plant Piping
(Site Storage, Handling, Conditioning & Issuance)
SAIC-W-2032
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
MH's SPENT
PASS
FAIL
CONTROL OF WELDING CONSUMABLES (General Requirements)
A1
An approved procedure exists that has incorporated the following:

A) SAIC-W-2009 Checklist (Procedure for Welding Consumables)
B) SAIC-W-2010 Checklist (Receiving Inspection of Consumables)
C) SAIC-W-2032 Checklist (Control of Welding Consumables)
D) SATR-W-2009 - Rod Oven Calibration (Storage, Bake, Portable)
E) SATR-W-2010 - Welding Consumable Issuance Record
F) SATR-W-2020 - Recv Insp Detail Form & QC log (Consumables)
SCH. Q, Att. IV
Table
(Procedure)
A2
Personnel involved in handling, storage, conditioning, issuance & controls

for use of welding consumables are identified with detailed responsibilities
and trained in the procedure use as follows:
A) Material Controller (Receipt, Control, Storage, Handling, Issue, etc)
B) Welding Foreman/Supervisor (Issue, Distribution, Control, Return)
C) QC Inspector (Monitors approved procedure and all activities)
D) Welders (Follows approved procedures and controls)
Note: Clear cut responsibilities are understood by all.
SCH. Q, Att. IV
Table
(Procedure)
A3
Procedure has provided details on how welding consumables are controlled

by the following but not limited to:
B) Material controller- Stock control (First in, First out) & issuance
C) Requestor/User - Issue & Receiving of consumables (Daily Basis)
D) Return of un-used consumables, ID system & reconditioning
Procedure is being followed by all responsible for the work.
SCH. Q, Att. IV
Table
(Procedure)
Storage of Welding Consumables (SAIC-W-2009 is to be incorporated into a Consumable Control Procedure)
B1
GTAW filler metals have either AWS/ASME identification or the

manufacture's identification marked on each individual rod, by the
manufacture, with flags, stencils or stamps.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.3
B2
Partially used GTAW filler metals have either AWS/ASME identification

(with flags, stencils or stamps) or the manufacture's identification marked
on each individual rod for traceability.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.3
B3
Storage ovens have continuous power supply during working and nonworking hours or days (nights and weekends).
SAES-W-011,
Table 1
B4
Re-bake ovens have calibrated Temperature Gauge.

(Note 1 of SAES-W-011, Table 1)
SAES-W-011,
Table 1
B5
Portable electrode storage ovens are regularly checked for keeping

temperature at a minimum of 65C.
SAES-W-011,
Table 1
B6
Low hydrogen electrodes, stainless steel and other non-ferrous electrodes

are kept in hermetically sealed metal containers.
SAES-W-011,
Table 1
B7
Atmospheric exposure of low hydrogen electrodes shall not exceed

Manufacture recommendation time period.
Page 1 of 10
TRAVEL TIME
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.2
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC-W-2032
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Handling & Conditioning of Electrodes
C1
The electrodes which has exceeded the permitted atmospheric exposure

as stated in Item B7 above and electrodes belongs to damaged
hermetically sealed containers shall undergo drying prior to its re/issue
for welding as per Manufacture recommendation.
C2
Electrodes are re-dried as per Manufacture recommendation and marked

or segregated prior to re-issue as per SAES-W-011.
C3
SAIC NUMBER
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.2
SAESS-PM-G0001520-0011
Para. 8.2/SAESW-011,Table 1
S-PM-G000-1520Drying of electrodes was performed as per Manufacture recommendation.
0011
Para. 8.2
C4
Dried electrodes & electrodes removed directly from its hermetically

sealed containers are stored in holding ovens as per Manufacture
recommendation.
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.2
C5
Any electrodes (low hydrogen or non-low-hydrogen) and fluxes that have

been wet or moist are discarded.
C6
Electrodes exposed to the atmosphere for less than the permitted

duration are re-conditioned as per manufacture recommendation.
C7
Non-low hydrogen electrodes to A5.1 or A5.5 are stored as per

manufacture recommendation.
C8
All fluxes are stored in sealed containers in a dry environment.
SAES-W-011,
Attachment 2
C9
Opened SAW flux containers are stored continuously in ovens at 65C

minimum, or at mfg's recommendation, whichever is greater.
SAES-W-011,
Attachment 2
C10
All electrodes are stored as per manufacture recommendation & filler

wires for SAW, GTAW, GMAW, & FCAW are stored in sealed containers
in dry environment. Attachment 1/3.
SAES-W-011,
Attachment 2
C11
All electrodes and filler wires for SAW, GTAW, GMAW, and FCAW that
have visible rusting or contamination are discarded.
SAES-W-011,
Attachment 2
C12
GTAW Tungsten Consumable Preparation & Redressing or Repair:

Practices utilize the proper equipment. See Attachment 2.
SAES-W-011,
Attachment 2
C13
Shielding gases have vendor certs attesting to the purity of their products
for the gases listed below:
S-PM-G000-1520A) Carbon dioxide (CO2): Federal Specification BC-C-101, Type B or
0011
Compressed Gas Association CGA G-6.2, Type F.
Para. 8.7
B) Argon (Ar): Compressed Gas Association CGA G-11.1 (99%+)
See Attachment 4
C14
Stainless Steel & Non-Ferrous electrodes have color coded ends to

prevent mixing electrodes. (Lessons Learned)
SAES-W-011,
Attachment 1&2
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.2
S-PM-G000-15200011
Para. 8.2
Procedure
Requirement
Control of Electrode Issuance and Return
D1
A project specific procedure or method statement for electrode issuance,

receiving and return was approved by SAPMT and Inspection (PID) per
SAIC-W-2009.
Best Practice
D2
A detailed list of checkpoints are added to this checklist after approval of

the procedure for control of electrode issuance, receiving and return is
approved.
Best Practice
Page 2 of 10
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3

PROJECT TITLE
ITEM
No.
SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2032
CONTRACT NUMBER
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
REMARKS:
Page 3 of 10
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2032
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
ATTACHMENTS: 1 - Consumable Control Practices Acceptable to COMPANY

Attachment 2 - GTAW Consumable Control Procedural Elements (Tungsten Electrodes & GTAW Filler Metal, Purging Consumables & Control)
Attachment 3 - SAES-W-011 - Conditioning, Storage & Exposure of Consumables (SAW Att. 2)
2. SAES-W-011, Welding Requirements for On-Plot Piping, (30 March 2005)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 4 of 10
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2032
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1 - Consumable Control Practices Acceptable to COMPANY

1. All Welding Consumables (electrodes*, filler wires, and fluxes) shall conform to ASME SEC IIC. (SAES-W-011, Para. 6.1) & shall meet an
applicable AWS specification & classification as packaged. Identification labelling shall clearly identify the product & Manufacturer certs (test reports)
shall attest to the correct AWS specification & classification. When "other" Non-ASME electrodes have been specified & are COMPANY approved
(through the WPS process), the same general controls shall apply. A Roster or Log shall be kept for each project(s) with documentation available for
Receiving (SATR-W-2010) and storage. Storage shall conform to the mfg detailed storage requirements as listed and available (attach to records with
Mfg Certs for all consumables). All welding consumables shall have manufacturer data sheets that show detailed storage requirements (temperature &
humidity limits at a minimum), or correspondence to provide adequate instruction in this regard. Shelf life shall be considered. Note: * Electrodes
shall include tungsten electrodes for GTAW process per AWS A5.12
Note: Welding Consumables shall have a SAP ID number to show their purchase from an approved vendor for specific consumable.
Best Practice for Vendor Uninspectable Welding Consumables is close receipt inspection & test report review, and by Inspection visit* to Vendor at
least once (COMPANY recommended). Currently, inspection visits are not required. Best Practice for electrodes* is their purchase specifically for
new projects in quantities based on Workscope using COMPANY-approved WPS as a basis for ordering consumables.
2. New consumables shall be received into Contractor's Quality system by recording pertinent information as listed on SATR-W-2020.
3. Existing consumables (shelf life) intended for use on Saudi Aramco Projects shall be evaluated for their quality and condition as follows & they
shall meet COMPANY, Welding Industry & Manufacturer recommended minimum quality requirements (with disposition) as follows: When meeting
applicable quality conditions, existing consumables shall be recorded into the Contractor's Quality System.
A) Electrodes without proper AWS Spec/Class labelling and/or traceability to manufacturer certs (records shall be kept for all consumables)
shall not be used on Saudi Aramco Projects and shall be removed from site to prevent their inadvertent use on Project work.
B) Electrodes older than 2* years shall not be used to make production welds on Saudi Aramco Projects. Electrodes shall be discarded or removed
from site to prevent their inadvertent use. Contractor shall assure electrode issue control follows a "First In, First Out" Rule.
*Note 1: Three (3) years shelf life is acceptable when demonstrated that mfg storage guidelines were met. (Temp/Humidity Controls)
*Note 2: When storage climate is questionable* (*Dry Environment = Air conditioned/dehumidified with calibrated hygrometer in use) electrodes
shall be limited to a shelf life of 2 years (max). See AWS Table for acceptable "storage before opening" limits.
*Note 3: Lincoln currently recommends a 3-year shelf life in certain brands of SMAW electrodes. When a manufacturer data sheet specifically states
detailed storage conditions (humidity & temperature) and a shelf life beyond three years, and storage requirements have been followed (as verified by
Quality), electrodes may be used for a period per manufacturer's instructions (to a three-year limit).
C) Electrodes found open and stored outside acceptable Manufacturer & Welding Industry recommended ranges shall be declared unfit for use
and removed from site to prevent their inadvertent use on Saudi Aramco Projects. Check E6010 storage closely.
Dry Environment Note: Air conditioned or climate controlled storage in cabinets within recommended temp ranges and relative humidity values
(verified by hygrometer) shall be demonstrated. In any disagreement, Electrode Mfg recommendations shall be made available and COMPANY shall
resolve all conflicts. Unacceptable is storage of Electrodes in open buildings subject to wide humidity ranges.
Typically, relative humidity can range from 5%-nearly 100% in Saudi Arabia in open areas without climate controls
Note: The Table above applies to AWS A5.1 & AWS A5.5 and is intended for reference only relative to the COMPANY requirement for a DRY
ENVIRONMENT. SAES-W-011 Attachments 1 & 2 shall be affixed to procedures and followed.
4. STORAGE & HOLDING TEMPS AFTER OPENING: 1. Per Lincoln, Electrode cans shall never be placed in ovens as cardboard liners char &
electrode temps are not uniform. CSD concurs with this point. 2. Per Lincoln, store non low hydrogen electrodes (6010, 7010, etc) from freshly
opened containers in heated cabinets at 100 to 120 degrees F (40 50 degrees C). AWS table above suggests 75 to 125 F.
SAES-W-011 states Dry Environment. CSD concurs that AWS & Lincoln temp ranges & a 50-70% relative humidity (typical air conditioned
room) constitute a "dry environment" acceptable for storage of opened non low hydrogen electrodes. CSD also concurs that opened non
low hydrogen electrodes (6010, 7010, etc) shall never be stored above 130F or below 50%RH
Best Practice is to operate a small oven (Bench, cabinet or Portable type) set at 100 F to maintain these conditions.
Page 5 of 10
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2032
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 2 - GTAW Consumable Control (Procedural Elements)

Page 6 of 10
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2032
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Page 7 of 10
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

SAIC-W-2032
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-

Individual gas components are identified by the following codes:
A - Argon
C - Carbon Dioxide
He -Helium
H - Hydrogen
N - Nitrogen
O - Oxygen
Table 4 - AWS Classifications for Typical Gas Mixtures:
All cylinders and containers shall be marked in accordance with DOT regulations plus the following information, legibly
marked on, or attached to, each cylinder:
i) AWS specification and classification designation (year of issue may be excluded).
ii) Suppliers name and product trade designation (name of gas)
iii) Approved DOT warning label
The following example designates the minimum labeling requirement to comply with this specification:
Table A l - Additional Information From Compressed Gas Association (CGA):CGA-G4 Oxygen

CGA-G5 Hydrogen
CGA-G6 Carbon Dioxide
CGAG6.3 Carbon Dioxide Cvlinder Filling and Handling Procedures
CGA-P-9 The Inert Gases Argon, Nitrogen, and Helium
P- 1 Safety Handling of Compressed Gases in Containers
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Buttering and / or Weld Build-up - Plant piping
SAIC-W-2033
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME

ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
Documentation:
A1
All WPS's, PQR's, & weld maps/tables to be used, shall have been
submitted as a complete package, for technical approval by COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.1.1
A2
All WPSs & PQRs shall conform to the latest edition of the relevant
Code (API STD 1104 or ASME SEC IX, as appropriate).
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 9.2.1
A3
All welders and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with

either ASME SEC IX, as applicable, for all welding, including tack,
temporary, and repair welds.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 10.1
ALIGNMENT / Fit-up:
B1
Buttering or weld build-up on prepared surfaces shall not exceed the

lesser of of the base metal thickness or 10 mm without the approval of
COMPANY. If the buttering or buildup exceeds this, then the following
S-PM-G000-1520requirements shall apply:
a) The
0011,
buttering operation shall be witnessed by COMPANY.
Para. 13.2.5.1
b) The buttering shall be inspected by RT, and PT or MT after completion
of the build-up but before final welding of the joint.
B2
Buttering of joints between dissimilar metal joints requires prior approval

by COMPANY. (Through WPS review process)
Joint Preparation:
C1
Oil, moisture, rust, scale, sand, paint or other foreign matter shall be
removed from weld surface 25 mm of adjacent base metal prior to
welding, including any such coatings on temporary attachments.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.1
C2
Thermally cut or gouged surfaces for all materials, including carbon

steels, shall be power brushed or ground prior to welding.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.2.2
C3
Thermal cut surfaces of stainless steel and non-ferrous materials shall be

ground to bright (unoxidized) material prior to welding.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.2.3
C4
Fittings re-cut or re-beveled shall have cut surface examined for

laminations before welding. COMPANY shall specify NDT method for use.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.3
Miscellaneous Requirements:
D1
When field welding in "remote" locations, remote Current controls shall be

used if the welding is > 30 m from welding power sources.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 21.1
D2
Welding power supplies are calibrated as per BS 7570 or an approved

equivalent, if impact toughness test is required by COMPANY or industry
specifications or codes. Calibration records shall be available to
COMPANY.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 21.2
Page 1 of 2
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 13.2.5.2
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Buttering and / or Weld Build-up - Plant piping
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2033
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
REMARKS:
2. BS 7570:2000, Code of practice for validation of arc welding equipment.
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 2
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Welder & Welding Operator Certification, Issuance of JCC (Job
Clearance Card) & Review of Performance (Plant Piping)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2035
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
General Requirements (Certification Review & Issuance of JCCs)
A1
All welders and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with

the ASME SEC IX as applicable for all welding.
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para.
10.1
A2
For SMAW performance qualification testing, welders shall be qualified

for all passes and the full thickness of the test coupon.
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.1.4
A3
Contractor welders shall be tested as per either ASME SEC IX, AWS
D1.1, or API STD 1104 as required, for ALL types of welding.
A4
Contractor welders working on projects shall be tested & certified by an

COMPANY approved independent welder testing agency.
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.2.2
A5
Essential Variables of Welder Qualification Certificate meet project

welding requirements, or, service condition and material type of piping &
structures being welded. Essential variables are per ASME Section IX,
QW-350 for the applicable process. See Attachment 1
SAES-W-011,
Para. 8.1
A6
Certifications of contractor welders shall be reviewed by the COMPANY

Assigned inspector prior to the start of work. A roster shall be provided.
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para.
10.2
A7
Initial production work of contractor welders shall be monitored by the

project inspector to determine their ability to make sound welds.
SAIC-W-2015 shall be utilized (Socket & Butt welds) for this purpose.
The first three welds (or more*) are to be RT'd. Use SAIC-W-2015 or
approved procedure* (*if more than 3).
Return JCCs
when welders fail to meet this Quality requirement .
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.2.6
See
SAIC-W-2015
A8
COMPANY Assigned Inspector shall audit welder certifications to ensure

fabricator compliance with the Codes, standards and approved Quality
Plan.
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.3.3
A9
Validation is maintained for each welder's work continuity within the range
S-PM-G000-1520of his qualification in full project. When welder has not welded with a
0011, Para.
process during 6 months or more, his qualifications shall expire, per
10.1
ASME IX, QW-322.1
A10
A Welders List shall be submitted to COMPANY Assigned Inspector prior

S-PM-G000-1520to the start of work. This list shall be maintained up to date by fabricator.
0011, Para.
The list shall include welders name, symbol, processes qualified and all
10.2
other important essential variables as well as certification issue dates.
A11
Welders shall carry an ID card that includes a photo, welders name,

company ID No. and welder symbol.
Page 1 of 6
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.3.1
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
S-PM-G000-15200011, Para.
10.1
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

PROJECT TITLE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SAIC-W-2035
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Specific Requirements (Return JCCs, Evaluate Performance / Revoke & Reissue JCCs)
Note: Pre-Job Agreement & Welding Process Control Procedure are required
B1
JCC's shall be returned to COMPANY Assigned Inspector when

contractor welder goes on home leave or is terminated from the project.
NOTE: Contractor welders that return to work within three months from
home leave (to the same project) may be reinstated without retesting.
B2
A) JCCs may be withdrawn at any time 'for cause', if the welder is not
producing work of acceptable quality (per approved procedure)
B) JCCs are reissued only after documented retraining (clearly
documented on welders performance/continuity record)
See Attachment 2 - Weld Quality Guideline @ COMPANY
SAEP-324,
Para. 6.5.5
SAEP-324,
Par 6.5.4
Welder performance according to ASME SEC IX

REMARKS:
2. SAEP-324, Certification Review and Registration of Project Welders and Brazers, (30 June, 2003)
3. ASME SECTION IX (1 July 2004), Welding and Brazing Qualifications
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 6
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2035
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 1 - ASME Section 9 (QW-350 & Tables, QW-452 & Tables) for Common Welder Qualifications
QW- 351: A Welder shall be requalified whenever a change is made in one or more of essential variables
listed for each welding process. Where a combination of welding processes is req'd to make a weldment,
each welder shall be qualified for the particular welding process or processes he will be required to use
in production welding. A welder may be qualified by making tests with each individual welding process,
or with a combination of welding processes in a single test coupon. The limits of weld metal thickness for
which he will be qualified are dependent upon the approximate thickness of the weld metal he deposits
with each welding process, exclusive of any weld reinforcement, this thickness shall be considered the
test coupon thickness as given in QW-452. In any given production weldment, welders may not deposit a
thickness greater than that permitted by QW-452 for each welding process in which they are qualified.
Socket welding note: Qualification shall also require RT of the first three production welds per SAIC-W-2037 reqmts.
Page 3 of 6
Attachment 1 - ASME Section 9 (QW-350 & Tables, QW-452 & Tables) for Common Welder Qualifications
Page 4 of 6
Rev 3

SAIC NUMBER
SAIC-W-2039
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
11-Dec-13
WELD-
Attachment 2 - Weld Quality Guideline at COMPANY (Reference - Welding Process Control Procedure)
Pre-Job Agreement by Procedure: Job Clearance Cards may be withdrawn by the project inspector at any time for cause
if the contractor welder is not producing work of acceptable quality. Weld Quality Guidelines must be agreed upon and
stated in the Contractor's Welding Process Control Procedure BEFORE the start of welding on Projects. Once
withdrawn, JCC's will only be reinstated upon receipt of written proof of training, and the successful completion of a
recertification test. Recertification test shall be supported by NDT on an agreed upon number of production welds (3
minimum) after retraining as a minimum. The welder must pass these welds and maintain an acceptable weekly repair
rate as stated in the Procedure. Reinstated Welders with JCC cards who fail to produce quality work may not reapply for
another JCC (in that process) for a minimum period of retraining to be approved by the Company.
Performance measurement: % Repairs obtained per joint and linear basis. Both methods shall be calculated and
the higher percentage rate shall govern. The maximum weekly repair rate for each welder should not exceed
3.0%.
Performance monitoring frequency: Daily (reported weekly)
Acceptance criteria % repair rate:
3.0% = Acceptable
4.99,3.0% = Warning letter issued by Subcontractors QC Manager
5.0% = Training and Requalification
Criteria for requalification shall be minimum 7 days training followed by a requalification test. Welder raining
and records shall be maintained. If the welder fails the requalification test further training may be given and a
second test may be taken. If the welder fails the second test then CONTRACTOR will not allow the welder to
weld on the Project.
Page 5 of 6
PROCEDURE NOTES Welder Performance Evaluation Guideline

1. Contractors Welding Process Control Procedure (Company approved) shall clearly
state acceptable Welding Performance parameters for each welder's initial, weekly &
overall production. This is agreed opon BEFORE Work begins.
2. Procedure shall define Linear & Joint method performance targets and these
quality targets shall be acceptable to COMPANY and approved before welding
begins.
3. Procedure shall detail NDT requirements of initial Welder production to determine
acceptability of welder performance, especially with new welders.
a.
First three joints as a minimum shall be examined. Procedures may require a
quantity greater than the first three (first 5, first 10, etc), especially for new welders.
b.
Welders shall not make additional initial production welds until their initial
performance has been verified and is acceptable per the procedure.
4. Procedure states maximum number of consecutive weeks that a welder can

exceed performance targets before being removed from work. Severe weather or
other factors beyond welder control may be considered. (Schamaal months)
5. Procedure shall state the amount of NDT up to 100% when target repair rates are
exceeded or when a welder has been removed from Work.
6. Pipeline Projects using Semiautomatic / Automatic / Combination Processes may
utilize even more stringent Weld Quality Guidelines than those listed above for
Manual process. Procedure & Pre-Job agreement define Quality targets.
7. In all cases, Welder performance should target A Classification results with

the lowest possible Linear & Joint Repair Rates achievable. (Continual Process
Improvement)
Page 6 of 6
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Inspect/Verify Piping & Weld Modifications* After Initial Welding
Acceptance (Modifications, Repair and Rework)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2036
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
11-Dec-13
SYSTEM ID.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
ITEM
No.
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
This checklist is to ensure that Piping & Weld Modifications* are properly identified, reported to SA, tracked & documented by Quality
Note Systems on IK Projects. Contractor QA/QC Mgrs shall incorporate these quality elements into their two Procedures for WELDING PROCESS
CONTROL & FIELD ENGINEERING CHANGE CONTROL. QA/QC Mgr Action on IK Projects.
A
IDENTIFICATION OF CHANGES & CONTROLS FOR QUALITY (PRIOR TO WELD REWORK & REPAIRS)
A1
Quality Procedure for Field Engineering Change Control has been

reviewed and approved by the COMPANY PQM.
SCH Q, ATT VI
TABLES
A2
Quality Procedure for Field Engineering Change Control identifies

scenarios for the basis of weld modifications.
Such
possibilities are detailed in the checklist below to aid QC.
SCH Q, ATT VI
TABLES
A3
Quality Procedures utilize a "common sense" approach for Piping &

Weld Modifications by (definition):
Rework is when entire weld(s) or piping spool(s) or system requires
change from existing conditions per Field Engineering:
A) Weld joint misalignment & damage (dogleg, bent, damaged)
B) Rework to achieve specified fabrication tolerance (slope, spacing
for other piping & insulation, structural clearances, etc.
C) Rework for any drawing & piping specification revisions that may
or may not affect existing identified welds.
D) Rework due to unacceptable root pass (Internal FBE)
Rework proposed is carefully planned and shall follow procedure.
Rework may or may not require Weld Repairs to identified welds.
Rework can include one or more "Repairs" to identified welds.
SCH Q, ATT VI
TABLES
A4
Repair is when an "identified" weld requires any excavation, cutting,

grinding, heating or physical change not associated with the normal WPS
approved process, interpass cleaning & surface prep for final acceptance
and any NDE surface conditioning.
SCH Q, ATT VI
TABLES
A5
Weld Modification (Repair) of a Previously Welded joint requires:

A) Was given a Unique Welding ID number per S-PM-G000-1520-0006.
B) Was accepted by the QC Inspector responsible for Fit-Up
C) Was welded out and completed or was partially welded before STOP
WORK was issued on the piping system under construction or other
direction was given to welder(s) responsible for the joint.
Welds modified at this stage in any way are "Repairs", once welding
has begun following fit-up acceptance by Inspection, even if no NDT was
performed on the joint. Correction methods shall follow an approved
"Repair" procedure using an approved WPS.
Example: Dogleg joint (cracked tack, etc). Excavation & removal of any
weld metal shall follow an approved procedure.
S-PM-G000-15200006, Section 8
A6
The minimum distance between parallel butt welds shall be 20 mm or

three times wall thickness of the joint, whichever is greater.
Repairs shall not violate this "encroachment" rule.
S-PM-G000-1520Distances shall be measured between the edges of the adjacent cap
0006,
Para
passes. These restrictions do not apply if one of the welds has been
11.15.1
PWHT'd prior to making a second weld or both welds have been PWHT'd
& inspected. Radiography of butt welds is always req'd when minimum
separation is not achieved.
Page 1 of 2
Rev 3
SAIC NUMBER

Inspect/Verify Piping & Weld Modifications* After Initial Welding
Acceptance (Modifications, Repair and Rework)
PROJECT TITLE
SAIC-W-2036
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
A7
Welds requiring re-work are physically identified on site, marked &

verified by Inspection prior to performimg any repair/rework.
Special Process
Procedure
A8
Method of identifying weld re-work follows a procedure.
Special Process
Procedure
A9
Procedure or method statement for repair/rework is submitted and

approved by COMPANY.
Special Process
Procedure
A10
Weld Map has indicated the location of weld to be re-worked.
Special Process
Procedure
A11
History of the weld was verified and if found to have been repaired twice
shall be recommended for additional repair attempt or be cut-out at the
descretion of the assigned COMPANY Inspector.
S-PM-G000-15200011,
Para. 20.1
A12
Detailed checklist identifies inspection requirements/acceptance criteria

in the same fashion as the SAICs is formed and submitted for
concurrence. (Required if a relevant SAIC is not available.)
Special Process
Procedure
A13
Welds requiring re-work by heating shall require approval by COMPANY.

If approved, all conditions & inspection requirements / acceptance criteria
are added to this checklist or in a separate checklist.
Special Process
Procedure
A14
Welds requiring re-work by cutting and re-welding are prepared &

inspected per applicable inspection checklists & Welding SATIPs
A16
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
ITEM
No.
A15
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
Project Quality
Plan
S-PM-G000-1520Reworked welds requiring re-welding are inspected using the original
0011,
testing method (as minimum requirement).
Para. 20.5
S-PM-G000-1520As-built of weld map and weld summary reports are updated to reflect the
0011,
status of the new or modified weld.
Para. 20.5
REMARKS:
2. SAES-W-012, Welding Requirements for Pipelines, (31 December, 2002)
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 2 of 2
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER
SAUDI ARAMCO TEST REPORT

Positive Material Identification (PMI) Report
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SATR-A-2012
PROJECT TITLE
12/11/2013 MECH-
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
SCHEDULED TEST DATE & TIME
ACTUAL TEST DATE & TIME
QR NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
Material Type: (Weld, Valve, Pipe, Weld, etc.)
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.
QUANTITY INSP.
PLANT NO.
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
Item Description: (Material Spec/Grade)
Type Of Instrument Used:

Model:
Serial No:
Date Of Calibration:
Required Element Composition per Spec
(Verify against ASME IIC Spec Tables)
_____
Cr
_____
Ni
_____
Mo
Nb
_____
_____
Ti
_____
Cu
___
_____
Analysis Result: (Evaluate Results in conjunction with SAIC-L-2010 Checklist & Attachments)
Equipment/
Line Number/
P.O. & line item
Weld
or
Part
No
Elements Verified (per SAES-A-206, Table 1)

C
Cr
Ni
Mo
Nb
Ti
Cu
Results of Chemical Analysis

Zn
Accept
Reject
Pending
Analysis
Color Code
00-SAIP-07 Att III
& PFI ES-22
NOTES: C=Carbon, Cr=Chrome, Cu=Copper, Ni=Nickel, Mo=Molybdenum, Nb=Niobium, Ti=Titanium, Zn=Zinc

1. Alloys are acceptable if the alloying elements are each within 10% of the specified range of values. (S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Para. 12.1)
2. Welds with consumables that match, or nearly match, the base metal composition shall be within 12.5% of the ranges allowed in ASME SEC IIC
for each element. (S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Para. 12.2). Chemical Composition of Material specs must be verified/available.
3. For weld overlays, the chemistry on the surface of overlays shall be in accordance with S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Para. 12.3
4. For dissimilar metal alloy welds (other than weld overlays), the effects of dilution from the different base metals and the filler metal shall be taken
into account for determining the nominal as-deposited weld metal composition. (S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Para. 12.3)
REMARKS:
1. S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Positive Material Identification,
Saudi Aramco

T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:

*Person Responsible for Implementation of Test and Analysis of Results
Y = YES
Page 1 of 1
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER

Positive Material Identification (PMI) Log Sheet
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SATR-A-2013
PROJECT TITLE
12/11/2013
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
MECH-
CONTRACTOR
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
NOTES: Per S-PM-G000-1520-0008, Para. 14.1.2 - The log shall identify each component and weld corresponding to an individual equipment item or
piping spool and shall include the equipment or spool number and purchase order number. To supplement this log, where applicable (per S-PM-G0001520-0008, Para. 14.2.3), the field Fabricator shall prepare a detailed PMI map of the pressured equipment being fabricated. The map shall show the
alloy material specification of each alloy component and the extent of PMI required per this standard.
Log No. Plant / P.O. #
Equipment / Line #
Item Description
PMI Report No. &

Date
Remarks
REMARKS:
1. S-PM-G000-1520-0008 - Positive Material Identification
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector


Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3

Post-Weld Heat Treatment Request
SATR NUMBER
PROJECT TITLE
WBS / BI / JO NUMBER
Item
No.
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DRAWING NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SATR-W-2004
MAT.
TYPE
SERVICE
DIA.
WT
WELDING
11-Dec-13
CONTRACTOR
HEAT
RATE
QR NUMBER
LOCATION
COOL
RATE
Contractor / Third-Party
SOAK
TEMP.
SOAK
TIME
REMARKS
Saudi Aramco
Engineering/Construction Representative*

T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
QC Supervisor
COMPANY Inspector
Verified
T&I Witnessed
Name, Sign and Date:
Page 1 of 1
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER

PWHT Report Form
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
SATR-W-2005
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
PRODUCTION DATE
11-Dec-13
LOCATION
CONTRACTOR
PWHT
Item #
Drawing No.
Line class
Material
Weld ID
Size
Type of
Joint
Welder
ID
Req. No.
Chart
No.
Loading Temp
(0C)
Rate of
Heating
(oC/Hr)
Soaking Soaking Time

(Mins)
Temp (0C)
PWHT Recorder
Rate of
cooling
(oC/Hr)
Unloading
Temp (oC)
Remarks
Serial No
Cal. Due date
Note: PWHT chart should be attached with this report. This form should be used with applicable PWHT procedure.
PREPARED BY
Technician (Third Party)
Name, Sign
and Date:
QC VERIFIED
QC Insp. / Supervisor - Subcon
Name, Sign
and Date:
REVIEW & VERIFIED

QC Insp. / Supervisor
Name, Sign
and Date:
REVIEW
COMPANY Inspector
Name, Sign
and Date:
SATR NUMBER
DAILY WELD FIT-UP and PRODUCTION REPORT-PLANT PIPING
SATR-W-2006
PROJECT TITLE
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACT NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
DAILY WELD FIT-UP and PRODUCTION REPORT

(WIR)
Record No.
Rev. No.
ITP No.
Page NO.
1of 1
Project
ISO
Serial
Drawing
No
No.
Fit-Up Inspection
Sht No. Rev. No.
Joint
No.
Welder ID No.
A Material
Size Sch
Type
Item
B Material
Heat No
Size
Sch
Type
Item
Heat
No.
Joint
Type
S/F
WPS
No
Root &
Hot
Fill &
Cap
VT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Note: Joint Type : BW-BUTT WELD, SW-SOCKET WELD, TR-THREADED, BR-BRANCH, RP-PAD, OL-OLET Item: P-PIPE, FFLANGE, E-ELBOW, T-TEE, R-REDUCER,WO-WELDOLET,SO-SOCKOLET,C-CAP
Subcontractor
COMPANY PMT
Name
Signature
Date
QR NUMBER
WELD-
0
1of 1
Inspecti
on
Remark
Date
P-PIPE, F-
PMT
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER
DAILY WELD FIT-UP and PRODUCTION REPORT (Field Weld)-PIPELINE

PROJECT TITLE
DATE APPROVED
SATR-W-2007
CONTRACT NUMBER
30-Jun-08
QR NUMBER
REPORT DATE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
LOCATION
SUBCONTRACTOR INSP LEVEL
QTY INSP
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
OTHER
PT
MT
REJ
ACC
QR
NUMBER
UT
POST VISUAL
COMPANY PMT REPRESENTATIVE
COMPANY Inspector
TRAVEL TIME
NDE REQUESTED
DATE
WELDING
COMPLETED
PREHEAT
TEMPERATURE
REJ
ACC
DATE
FIT-UP
FIT-UP
INSP
WPS
TYPE OF WELD
CAP B
CAP A
FILL B
FILL A
ROOT B
HEAT
NO.
WELDER I.D.
ROOT A
PIPE
MH's SPENT
LINE CLASS
WELD PROCESS
SPOOL ID
WELD NO.
BENDING DEG.
MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
and GRADE
LENGTH (MTR)
LINE NO.
THICKNESS
DIAMETER
ITEM
DRAWING NO.
ARAMCO INSP LEVEL
RT
CONTRACTOR INSP LEVEL
NDE CAT
10% or 100%
SATIP ACTIVITY NUMBER
SATIP NUMBER
PWHT
AVEL TIME
Rev 3
SATIP NUMBER
30-Jun-08
SATR NUMBER
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SATR-W-2008
WELD SUMMARY, WELDER PERFORMANCE and NON-DESTRUCTIVE (NDT) TRACKING SYSTEM

CONTRACT NUMBER
PROJECT TITLE
DATE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
LOCATION
PREPARED BY:
VERIFIED BY:
REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY:
REVIEWED BY:
CONTRACTOR QC INSPECTOR
COMPANY Inspector
WELDING SUPERVISOR
SUBCONTRACTOR QC INSPECTOR
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
NAME:
SIGN:
SIGN:
SIGN:
SIGN:
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
DATE:
REMARKS
DATE NDE WAS

COMPLETED
PMI REPORT NUMBER
PMI
TESTING
HARDNESS TESTING
REPORT NUMBER
HARDNESS TESTING
PWHT REPORT
NUMBER
PWHT
OTHER NDE REPORT

NUMBER
OTHER NDE TYPE
OTHER NDE
ACC
REJ
WELD
QUALITY
REJ
FILM
QUALITY
ACC
%
REVIEWED
100%
RESULT
RESULT
SAUDI ARAMCO RT FILM EVALUATION
10%
T2
3rd RT REPAIR 2
REPORT NUMBER
T1
2nd RT REPAIR 1
REPORT NUMBER
TRACER
WELDS
RESULT
1st RT
REPORT NUMBER
NDE REQUEST
QR NUMBER
DATE NDE WAS

REQUESTED
PERCENTAGE OF NDE
REQUIRED
POST VISUAL
INSPECTION QR NO.
POST VISUAL
RESULT
WPS PARAMETERS
VERIFIED
WPS NUMBER
DATE WELDED
CAP B
CAP A
FILL B
FILL A
ROOT B
WELDERS SYMBOL
ROOT A
FIT-UP INSPECTIONQR
NUMBER
FIT-UP DATE
WELD PROCESS
DIAMETER
SCHEDULE
WELD TYPE
SPOOL NUMBER
GRADE
MATERIAL
LINE CLASS
LINE NUMBER
ISOMETRIC
DWG NUMBER
WELD NUMBER
ITEM NUMBER
WELD SUMMARY, WELDER PERFORMANCE & SPECIAL PROCESS (NDE, etc) TRACKING SYSTEM
Rev 3
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SATR NUMBER
Welding Rod Oven Calibration/Verification Report
SATR-W-2009 11-Dec-13
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
REV. NO.
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
WELDING ROD OVEN TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION/VERIFICATION

A Electrode Oven/Quiver No.
UNIT # ____
UNIT # ____
UNIT # ____
UNIT # ____
A1 Brand/Make:
A2 Serial Number
B
Thermometer
Reading
THERMOSTAT SETTING
Thermometer Reading Thermometer Reading
Thermometer Reading
B1 120C
B2 430C
C
RESULT
C1
Approved for
Electrode storage
C2
Approved for
Electrode drying
C3
Approved as Portable
Oven
D Re-Calibration Due Date
REMARKS:
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: 2. S-PM-G000-1520-0010, Welding Requirements for Pressure Vessels

3. SAES-W-012, Welding Requirements for Pipelines, (31 December, 2002)
4. SAES-W-017, Welding Requirements for API Tanks, (7 December, 2005)
Contractor /Subcontractor
Saudi Aramco
Technician Performing Test*
Test Performed Successfully and Results are Acceptable:

Name, Title, Department,
Company, Initials and Date:
T&I
Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I
Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I
Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector
Witnessed Test

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 1 of 1
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER

Welding Machines Verification Report
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SATR-W-2011
PROJECT TITLE
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
1) Switch on the equipment 5 minutes before any calibration measurements.

2) Start with the minimum output setting, energize and stabilize the power source for 10 s; then take a reading.
Repeat this procedure for each of the measurement points below the maximum.
3) After a further 10 seconds take a second reading at the maximum setting, and repeat this procedure for each of
NOTES:
the measurement points down below the minimum.
4) The power source should not be loaded greater than that shown on the rating plate.
5) If validation at a particular current and/or voltage is required, but the nature of the load does not permit that
current or voltage at the corresponding load voltage or current to be achieved, take points over and below the
desired values and calculate the required value.
Ambient Temp: ____ C
Supply Voltage: _______ V
Validation method:
Load Resistor
Meter Yype
Function under test:
Type of validation:
Accuracy
Precision
Current Control
Voltage Control
Grade of validation (Att. 1 - Table's 1 ): STANDARD
Range of function under validation:

a) full range of the control or meter;
b) partial range of the control or meter;
c) selected points over the range of the control or meter. (Note: Items b) or c) shall be agreed upon by Contr. & S. Aramco )
Conventional load (BS EN 60974-1, Para. 7.4);
Arc Load
121212-
Power
Source Meter
Reading (volts)
Avg:
_____
Test
Instrument
Reading
(volts)
Avg:
1_____
2Avg:
1_____
2121212-
Avg:
_____
Avg:
_____
Fail
Power Source
Dial Setting (volts)
Pass
Voltage Control Verification

Fail
Test
Instrument
Reading
(amps)
Avg:
1_____
2Avg:
1_____
2-
Pass
Power Source
Dial Setting (amps)
Power
Source Meter
Reading (amps)
%+/-
Current Control Verification
%+/-
External load:
Avg:
_____
Avg:
_____
Avg:
_____
RESULT:
2. BS 7570, Code of Practice for validation of Arc Welding Equipment, (2000)
3. BS EN 60974-1, British Standard - Arc Welding Equipment-Part 1: Welding Power Sources, (30 September, 2003)
ATTACHMENTS:
1. Acceptance Criteria for STANDARD Grade of Validation: * Table 1 - Validation accuracies for standard grade power sources;
* Table B.1 - Validation accuracies for wire feed equipment: * Conventional Load (Test) to BS EN 60974-1, Para. 7.4
Saudi Aramco
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 1 of 1
N = NO F = FAILED

Welding Machines Verification Report
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER
SATR-W-2011
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
MECH.
Attachment 1 - Acceptance Criteria for STANDARD Grade of Validation
Conventional Load (Test) to BS EN 60974-1, Para. 7.4
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER

Hardness Test Report (With S-PM-G000-1520-0006 Weld Tracking
Criteria)
PROJECT TITLE
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SATR-W-2012
REV. NO.
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
CODE:
WELD-
11-Dec-13
CONTRACT NUMBER
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
MAT'L/Class/Gr/P-No:
EQUIPMENT (Check or list as applicable): Telebrinell _____ MIC 10 _____ Minibrineller _____ CSD App'd Other:
TEST BAR(S) - BNH VALUE AS STAMPED:
BHN CRITERIA (SAIC-W-2014):
TEST BAR & WELD RETESTS MARKED (Y / N or N/A):
10% Random Selection* (Y / N / Other Extent):
Note*: 10% Random Weld Selection (Per Sour Service Line Class, By Welder, Joint Type, & Repairs (Use Comments Section):
UNIQUE WELD IDENTIFICATION

Isometric, Line Class/Line No, Weld
Joint No, Spool No, (Welder ID No),
Other unique ID No
DIA.
THK
JT* SOUR
PWHT
Type SERV
Y/N
B/F/O Y/N
EQUIVALENT BRINELL TEST

RESULT
HAZ
WELD
HAZ
RESULT/COMMENTS
(Accept, Unacceptable**)
** Further Investigation req'd
REMARKS: 1. Tech & QC followed SAIC-W-2014 Checklist (Approved Procedure per SAIC-W-012) before accepting results.
2. Joint code is: B = Butt weld (aligned in same plane, use Telebrinell), F = Fillet weld (Use MIC-10 or Minibrineller for small fillets),
O = Other joint (Groove welds such as weld bosses, O-lets, others with extreme curved geometry, inaccessible to Telebrinell)
3. Identify any randomly selected welds for Sour Service Line Classes & show Random Sampling Extent (Use Comments)
Saudi Aramco
Technician Performing Test*

Name, Title, Department,
Company, Initials and Date:
Test Performed Successfully and Results are Acceptable:
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
Witnessed Test
COMPANY Inspector

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 1 of 1
N = NO F = FAILED
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER
WEEKLY WELDER REPAIR RATE REPORT
6/30/08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
REPORT DATE
SATR-W-2013
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACT NUMBER
CONT.
LOCATION

SATIP NUMBER
SUB-CONTRACTOR INSP LEVEL
ARAMCO INSPECTION LEVEL
QTY INSP
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
WEEKLY WELDER REPAIR RATE REPORT
ITEM
LINEAR/JOINT BASIS
WELDERS
NAME
THIS WEEK
CUMULATIVE
THIS WEEK
CUMULATIVE
SYMBOL
REMARKS
NUMBER JOINTS
WELDED
NUMBER JOINTS
RT
NUMBER JOINTS
REJECTED
100%
100%
100%
10%
10%
10%
REJECT
%
JOINT
NUMBER
JOINTS
WELDED
NUMBER JOINTS
RT
100% 10% 100%
10%
NUMBER OF
JOINTS
REJECTED
100%
10%
REJECT
%
JOINT
NUMBER INCHES
WELDED
NUMBER INCHES
RT
100%
100%
10%
10%
NUMBER
INCHES
REJECTED
100% 10%
REJECT
%
INCHES
NUMBER
INCHES
WELDED
NUMBER
INCHES
RT
100% 10% 100%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
COMPANY PMT REPRESENTITIVE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
COMPANY Inspector
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NUMBER
INCHES
REJECTED
10% 100% 10%
REJECT
%
INCHES
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER
WELDER REPAIR ASSESSMENT and TRACER WELD REPORT-WEEKLY

PROJECT TITLE
SATR-W-2018
CONTRACT NUMBER
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVEDQR NUMBER
REPORT DATE
WELD-
CONTRACTOR
LOCATION
SATIP NUMBER
WELD PROCESS
WPS
NUMBER
DATE
WELDED
WELDER's SYMBOL
TRACER
WELD
NUMBER
REJECTED
WELD
NUMBER
ITEM
WELDER's NAME
SUBCONTRACTOR INSP LEVEL
ARAMCO INSP LEVEL

MH's SPENT
QUALIFICATIONS
REPAIR WELD RESULTS

R1
LINE
NUMBER
DRAWING
NUMBER
INITIAL
WELD DEFECTS
RESULT
NDT
REPORT
NUMBER
TRACER WELD RESULTS
R2
RESULT
R1
NDT
REPORT
NUMBER
CUT OUT
RESULT
P1
P1
P2
P1
P2
P1
P2
R2
NDT
REPORT
NUMBER
P2
TRAVEL TIME
P1
P2
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
NAME
SIGN
DATE
COMPANY Inspector
NAME
SIGN
DATE
RESULT
NDT
REPORT
NUMBER
CUT OUT
SATR NUMBER

WEEKLY and CUMMULATIVE WELD STATUS REPORT
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
DATE
SATR-W-2019
PROJECT TITLE
WBS/BI/JO NUMBER
CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR
LOCATION

SATIP NUMBER
MAIN CONTRACTOR (LSTK) INSP. LEVEL
QTY. INSP.
MHR's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME
PROJECT WELD STATUS REPORT

WEEKLY WELD REJECTION STATUS
A
Fab Shop
Welds
FROM
Categories
Joints
Welded
This Week
RT
Requested This
Week
RT
Completed This
Week
RT
Accepted This
Week
RT
Rejected
This Week
Tracer
Welds
Required
This Week
Joints
Re-Shoot
This Week
Joints
Re-Shoot
Last Week
(Backlog)
Number
of
RT Crews
Weld
Length
RT'd
(Inches)
This Week
Length
Weld
Defects
(Inches)
This Week
Reject Rate (%)

Joint
Method
This Week
Reject Rate (%)

Linear
Method
This Week
RT
Backlog
RT
Backlog
Alarm
Reject Rate Alarm

(Green-<5%)
(Red>5%)
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
10%+
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Additional Welds
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Sub-Total
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
10%+
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Additional Welds
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Sub-Total
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Categories
Joints
Welded
To Date
RT
Requested
To Date
RT
Completed
To Date
RT
Accepted
To Date
RT
Rejected
To Date
Tracer
Welds
Required
To Date
Tracer
Welds
Completed
To Date
Re-Shoot Required
To Date
Re-Shoot
Completed
To Date
Weld
Length
RT'd
(Inches)
To Date
Length of
Weld
Defects
(Inches)
To Date
Reject Rate (%)

Joint
Method
To Date
Reject Rate (%)

Linear Method
To Date
RT
Backlog
RT
Backlog
Alarm
Reject Rate Alarm

(Green-<5%)
(Red>5%)
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
10%+
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Additional Welds
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Sub-Total
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
10%+
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Additional Welds
100%
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Sub-Total
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Field Welds
WEEKLY
TOTALS
CUMULATIVE WELD REJECTION STATUS

A
Fab Shop
Welds
TO
Field Welds
COMMULATIVE
TOTAL
FROM
TO
PREPARED BY:
QC VERIFIED BY:
REVIEWED & VERIFIED BY:
REVIEWED BY:
CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTITIVE
QC INSPECTOR/SUPERVISOR
MAIN CONTRACTOR or LSTK REPRESENTITIVE
COMPANY Inspector
NAME
NAME
NAME
NAME
SIGN
SIGN
SIGN
SIGN
DATE
DATE
DATE
DATE
Rev 3
SATR NUMBER
Welding Consumable Receiving Insp Report
30-Jun-08
DATE APPROVED
QR NUMBER
SATR-W-2020
PROJECT TITLE
REV. NO.
WELD-
11-Dec-13
WBS / BI / JO NUMBER
CONTRACTOR
EQPT CODE
SYSTEM ID.
PLANT NO.
EC / PMCC / MCC NO.

QUANTITY INSP.
MH's SPENT
TRAVEL TIME

Date
Rec'd
ASME II C / AWS
SPEC
CLASS
SIZE
Diam/L
Manufacturer & Product Description

(UNIT PACKAGE TYPE & WEIGHT)
Unique ID No.
Batch/
Blend/
Mix/Heat
Lot*
INSPECTION REMARKS
* See Attachment for Tests on
Received Consumables
INSTRUCTIONS: DO NOT USE ELECTRODE OR FILLER MAT'L "LOTS" on SA Projects for production welding until PMI tests verify composition.
At the latest, test the first production weld. Test consumables immediately after receipt to avoid "surprise" of "bad batches". Specs requiring PMI at COMPANY are:
SFA-5.4 SS Electrodes (SMAW) --- SFA-5.5 Low-Alloy Electrodes (SMAW) --- SFA-5.6 Copper & Alloy Electrodes --- SFA-5.7 Copper & Alloy Rods & Electrodes
SFA-5.9 Bare SS Electrodes & Rods --- SFA-5.11 Nickel & Alloy Electrodes (SMAW) --- SFA-5.12 Tungsten & Alloy Electrodes --- SFA-5.13 Surfacing Electr. (SMAW)
SFA-5.14 Nickel & Alloy Bare Electrodes & Rods --- SFA-5.21 Bare Electrodes & Rods, Surfacing --- SFA-5.22 SS Electrodes (FCAW) & SS Flux Cored Rods (GTAW)
SFA-5.23 Low-Alloy Electrodes & Fluxes (SAW) --- SFA-5.28 Low-Alloy Electrodes & Rods (GMAW) ---SFA-5.29 Low-Alloy Electrodes (FCAW)
ITEM
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
REFERENCE
PASS
FAIL
N/A
RE-INSP DATE
No.
A1
Electrodes are properly stored & segregated in stores, shops, or ovens to avoid mixup. Use separate ovens for different type* consumables. (*CS, Low Alloy)
SAES-A-206,
Section 7.7
A2
Ensure inventory control is established to account for ALL of those consumables

that are checked-out. (Issue Slip/Proc). SATR-W-2010
SAES-A-206,
Section 7.7
A3
One consumable from each lot is PMI-tested. Remainder of lot shall be compared
to the identified consumable to verify that markings of electrodes & filler wires are
correct. Log any unique markings (mfg codes)
SAES-A-206,
Section 7.7
A4
A5
A6
PMI test of weld metal* (*deposited or undiluted "buttons") was performed prior to
welding or during initial welding process. Note: Certain weld rods have alloying
elements contained in the flux, & do not meet alloy spec until welded. To weld
"buttons" ... simply open the applicable spec (SFA 5.5, etc) and refer to the Figure 1
- Pad for Chemical Analysis of undiluted Weld Metal ... follow instruction
The above specified materials were received into stock for use on SA Projects on
date(s) shown. Physical Inspection was performed along with review of the SA
Approved Consumable Manufacturer Test Reports (attached to report). Records
included material & test certifications. These were checked against the applicable
ASME II C Consumable specification (SFA 5.1, 5.4, 5.5, etc) and all material &
testing reqmts met the listed minimum acceptable requirements.
Complete section using the applicable SAIC for Receiving Insp.
Above material (certs) were reviewed against the intended welding application
(WPS, PQR). Essential variables & SA rqmts were checked per the applicable
"SAIC" for Consumable Control (incl any WPS Cover Sheet Remarks by CSD).
Consumable is acceptable for use on the WPS listed in Remarks
SAES-A-206,
Section 7.7
(See Attachment)
ASME SEC II C,
Consumables
SFA 5.01
Check
Application
(WPS & PQR)
before Issuing
Consumables
ASME SEC II C,
Consumables
Applicable
SAES-W-Std
Issue
Consumables for
Project & WPS
listed below
REMARKS:
Construction Representative*
Saudi Aramco
Work is Complete and Ready for Inspection:

T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
T&I Witnessed
QC Record Reviewed
Work Verified
QC Inspector
COMPANY Inspector
Witnessed Test
QC Supervisor

Name, Organization,
Initials and Date:
Y = YES
Page 1 of 1
N = NO F = FAILED

SATIP W 011 01 Welding of On Plot Piping

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SATIP W 011 01 Welding of On Plot Piping

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID FORM REV 1 - 010109

SAUDI ARAMCO TYPICAL INSPECTION PLAN

Welding of On-Plot Piping

Welder/Welding Operator Certification Review and Issuance of

Method Statement & WPS for weld Repair, ie:

Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT) Procedure & Equipment

Weld Hardness Testing Procedure & Proposed M&TE Equipment

Gap Control Procedure & Inspection of Welded Socket & Threaded

Positive Material Identification Procedure (Alloy Verification)

A) NDE Proc. (Technique)

Procedure for Control of Welding Consumables

Welding Overlays & Clad Materials*

Refer to SATIP No: W-014-01(*Rare application)

Welding Strip Linings* (As Required)

Refer to SATIP No: W-015-01 & applicable SATIP-W series (as

Use SAIC-L-2015 during process(See SATIP-L-350-01)

SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID FORM REV 1 - 010109

SAUDI ARAMCO TYPICAL INSPECTION PLAN

Welding of On-Plot Piping

Welding Special* Corrosion-Resistant Materials (As Required)

Receiving Inspection & Verification of Welding Consumable

Saudi aramco shall verify and inspect the first batch of

Verify Welding Equipment Calibration

First Calibration witnessed, Random witnessing by SA thereafter.

Verify Positive Material Identification of Low Alloy, Stainless Steel,

Refer to Note 1 General Notes for SA Inspection responsibility, after

Welding Overlays & Clad Materials

See SATIP No: W-014-01 (As Required)

Welding Strip Linings

See SATIP N0: W-015-01, etc (As required)

Welding Special* Corr-Resistant Mat'ls

See SATIP No: W-016-01 (As Required)

Welding Consumable Control (Storage, Handling, Issue &

Buttering or Weld Build-Up of Joints

Refer to SATIP No: W-016-01 *Applies to welds of certain P-No 8

WELDING CONSUMABLES ISSUANCE REPORT will follow S-EPGC00-1520-0007_R2

SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID FORM REV 1 - 010109

SAUDI ARAMCO TYPICAL INSPECTION PLAN

Welding of On-Plot Piping

Pre-Welding & Weld Joint Fit-Up Inspection

Post-Welding Visual Inspection

Repair of Weld Joints or Base Metal by Welding (Prior to Weld

Selection of Weld Joints for NDE*

Verify NDE Method Application and Evaluation, Documentation &

Database Reporting (per SAEP-1160)

In-Process Weld Inspection

SAIC-M-2012 (AWS D1.1) for structural

Saudi Aramco reviews on weekly basis

SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID FORM REV 1 - 010109

SAUDI ARAMCO TYPICAL INSPECTION PLAN

Welding of On-Plot Piping

Post Weld Heat Treatment Inspection

Verification of Hardness Testing Application and Results

Positive Material Identification (PMI) of Deposited Weld for alloyed

Modification or Re-Work After Weld Acceptance (Use with SAIC-WSAIC-W-2036

Refer to Applicable SATIP for Pressure Testing. Test Pkg

Hold Point for QC Inspection/ Test

SAUDI ARAMCO ID/PID - 18-MAY-05 - REV 0 (Standards Cutoff - June 2008)

SAUDI ARAMCO INSPECTION CHECKLIST

LAYOUT DRAWING NUMBER

SCHEDULED INSPECTION DATE & TIME

ACTUAL INSPECTION DATE & TIME

CONTRACTOR INSPECTION LEVEL